Pioneer VSX-LX51 User manual

Pioneer VSX-LX51 User manual
VSX-LX51_HY.book
1 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Operating Instructions
audio/video multi-channel receiver
VSX-LX51_HY.book
2 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please
ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement
cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe
electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue : Neutral Brown : Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En
WARNING
WARNING
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
D3-4-2-1-3_B_En
or moisture.
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
equipment.
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
D3-4-2-1-9a_A_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
30 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
STAN
DBY/
ON
VSX-LX51_HY.book
3 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
on vacation).
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
strong artificial light)
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
K041_En
warranty period.
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.
Private households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential
negative effects on the environment and human health.
K058_A_En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
4 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
Contents
01 Before you start
05 Listening to your system
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Checking what’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . 10
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Better sound using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Front Stage Surround Advance. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . .
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . .
Using the genre synchronizing function. . . . . . . . . . .
03 Connecting your equipment
06 Using the tuner
02 5 minute guide
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver
or other set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR
and other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting digital audio sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
About the WMA9 Pro decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting a component to the front
panel inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
04 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 25
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4
En
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving FM stereo sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
An introduction to RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using EON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
32
33
33
34
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
37
07 The System Setup menu
Making receiver settings from the System
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional. . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
38
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
46
47
48
48
49
50
50
VSX-LX51_HY.book
5 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
08 Other connections
11 Using other functions
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connecting your iPod to the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
iPod playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting your USB device to the receiver . . . . . . 53
Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Compressed audio compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 55
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 55
Speaker B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Bi-amping your front speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Bi-wiring your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connecting additional amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
MULTI-ZONE listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting an IR receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Switching components on and off
using the 12 volt trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV . . . . 60
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer
flat screen TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 62
Advanced MCACC output using your PC . . . . . . . . . 62
Setting the Audio options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making an audio or a video recording. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimming the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching the speaker impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
09 HDMI Control
Making the HDMI Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Synchronized amp mode operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
About HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
10 Other Settings
The Input Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 66
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat screen TVs . . . . . . . . . . . 68
OSD Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
69
70
71
72
72
72
72
72
73
73
12 Controlling the rest of your system
Setting the remote to control other components. . . .
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating other Pioneer components
with this receiver’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
74
74
76
76
77
13 Additional information
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important information regarding the HDMI
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . .
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening modes with different input
signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stream direct with different input signal formats . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
78
78
80
81
81
82
82
83
83
84
85
86
86
87
87
88
89
90
94
95
95
5
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
01
6 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Before you start
Chapter 1:
Before you start
Features
• Advanced Direct Energy design
This receiver offers a new advancement in discrete
design unique to Pioneer for high-power drivability, low
distortion and stable imaging. Through a circuit design
that minimizes the energy loss of the amplifier for each of
the channels, this receiver generates equal amplifier
power to all channels, eliminating the possibility of one
channel dominating a particular sound field.
• Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This
innovative technology measures the reverb
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to
customize your system calibration with the help of a
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen or
using computer. With the additional benefits of
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave
control and microphone measurements from a series of
reference points, your home theater experience can be
truly customized for optimal surround sound.
• THX Select2 Plus certified design
This receiver bears the THX Select2 Plus logo, which
means it has passed a rigorous series of quality and
performance tests covering every aspect of the product.
This includes testing of pre-amplifier and power amplifier
performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain,
making your home theater experience as faithful as
possible to what the director intended.
• Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD
Master Audio
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound
right into your home with up to six channels of surround
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing
surround sound for any stereo source.
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.
6
En
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,
which are designed for the next-generation highdefinition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver
as primary audio).
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.
• Phase Control
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this
receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound
image at your listening position.
• Sound Retriever
The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology
that helps bring CD quality sound back to WMA, MP3
and MPEG-4 AAC audio files by restoring sound pressure
and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after
compression.
• Front Stage Surround Advance
With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can
enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using
only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality
of the original sound.
• Auto Level Control
When the source is played in Auto level control stereo
mode (A.L.C.), this receiver automatically equalizes the
playback sound level according to the variation in
recording levels between music sources recorded in the
portable audio player.
• HDMI and digital video conversion
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video
format, providing you with high-definition digital video/
audio via a single cable.
High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby
TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also
compatible with the DeepColor feature. You can operate
this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer
component that supports the HDMI Control function by
connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI.
Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver
makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and
analog video signals being input are converted and
output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.
VSX-LX51_HY.book
7 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Before you start
• iPod and USB Ready
This receiver has the terminals for connecting an iPod
unit and a USB mass storage device.
01
Loading the batteries
The iPod terminal is ready for handling digital audio, and
this receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes on-screen
control of your iPod an added possibility.
The USB terminal allows you to listen to two-channel
audio from a USB mass storage device connected to this
receiver.
Caution
Checking what’s in the box
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied
accessories:
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)
• Remote control unit
• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries x2
• AM loop antenna
• FM wire antenna
• Warranty card
• These operating instructions
Installing the receiver
• When installing this receiver, make sure to put it on a
level and stable surface.
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
• Never use new and old batteries together.
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries
properly according to the marks in the battery case.
• Batteries with the same shape may have different
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
• WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
Don’t install it on the following places:
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.
– in direct sunlight
– in damp or wet areas
– in extremely hot or cold areas
– in places where there is vibration or other movement
– in places that are very dusty
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
7
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
02
8 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
5 minute guide
Chapter 2:
5 minute guide
Introduction to home theater
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to
create a surround sound effect, making you feel like
you’re in the middle of the action or concert. The
surround sound you get from a home theater system
depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the
source and the sound settings of the receiver.
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel
Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according
to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to
make changes for realistic surround sound, but other
possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel
surround sound) are explained in Listening to your
system on page 29.
Listening to Surround Sound
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible
setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide,
you should have your system hooked up for surround
sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply
leave the receiver in the default settings.
• Be sure to complete all connections before
connecting this receiver to an AC power source.
1 Connect your TV and DVD player.
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 16 to do
this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a
digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.
2 Connect your speakers and place them for optimal
surround sound.
Connect your speakers as shown in Installing your
speaker system on page 20.
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the
sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best
surround sound effect. Also see Placing the speakers on
page 21 for more on this.
Center (C)
Front
Left (L)
Front
Right (R)
Subwoofer (SW)
Surround
Right (SR)
Surround
Back Right (SBR)
Listening
position
Surround
Left (SL)
Surround Back Left (SBL)
3 Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by
your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.
Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the
receiver.1 Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV
to this receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV
if you don’t know how to do this.
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.
4 Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up
your system.
See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 9 for more on this.
5 Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.
Make sure that DVD is showing in the receiver’s display,
indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it isn’t, press
DVD on the remote control to set the receiver to the DVD
input.
In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a
source on page 10, there are several other sound options
you can select. See Listening to your system on page 29
for more on this.
See also Making receiver settings from the System Setup
menu on page 38 for more setup options.
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 15-second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process.
The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the
HDMI Control mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the HDMI Control feature, see HDMI Control on page 63.
8
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
9 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
5 minute guide
02
Automatically setting up for surround
sound (Auto MCACC)
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for
both channel delay and channel level. After you have set
up the microphone provided with your system, the
receiver uses the information from a series of test tones
to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your
particular room.
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a
source on page 10.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
MCACC SETUP MIC jack:
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
L
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO R
Important
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected and the iPod
USB function should not be selected as an input
source.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
AUDIO
PARAMETER
RECEIVER
EXIT
SOURCE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TUNE
TOP MENU
DVD
BD
TV
HDMI
DVR 1
DVR 2
CD
CD-R
iPod USB
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
TOOLS
CH
MENU
T.EDIT
TV CTRL
ENTER
ST
FM/AM
DTV/TV
PTY
SEARCH
RECEIVER
ST
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
The Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone
is connected.1
1.Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
[
Normal
]
Save SYMMETRY to
[ M1.MEMORY 1
]
START
ENTER:Start
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
DIGITAL IN
+
:Cancel
3 Make sure ‘Normal’ is selected,2 select an MCACC
preset3, press RECEIVER and then select START4.
4 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to
a comfortable volume level.
5 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the
speaker configuration in the OSD.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.5
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 6.
RETURN
SETUP TUNE
MAIN
ZONE 2
iPod CTRL
INPUT
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your
normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make
sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and
the microphone.
Note
1 • You can’t use the System Setup menu in either the main or sub zone when the iPod USB input source is selected. When you set ZONE 2 to ON
(page 58), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
• If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear.
2 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker
setting on page 41 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select CUSTOM and choose YES for the THX Speaker setting.
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can
rename it later in Data Management on page 46).
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and
FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38 for more on this.
5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
9
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
02
10 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
5 minute guide
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check Microphone.) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
1.Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing …
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
Speaker YES/NO
1.Auto MCACC
CHECK!
(2/9)
[ OK ]
[
]
[
]
Front
[ YES
Center
[ YES
Surr
[ YES
SB
[ YES x 2
SW
[ YES
:Cancel
10
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
]
]
]
]
]
OK
:Cancel
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.1
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the
power and check the speaker connections. If there
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /
to select the speaker and / to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
RECEIVER
SOURCE
DVD
BD
TV
HDMI
DVR 1
DVR 2
CD
CD-R
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
9
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
THX
CH
6 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker
Distance, Standing Wave and Acoustic Cal EQ.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
7 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press RETURN
to go back to the System Setup menu.2
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 38).3
HDD
iPod USB
INPUT
SELECT
VOL
1
2
3
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
STATUS
PHASE
MUTE
DIMMER
GENRE
RETURN
SETUP TUNE
iPod CTRL
AUTO/
DIRECT
TV CONTROL
FM/AM
PTY
SEARCH
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TUNE
TOOLS
CH
1 Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for
example a DVD player), your TV4 and subwoofer (if you
have one), then the receiver (press  RECEIVER).
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.
2 Select the input source you want to play.
You can use the input source buttons on the remote
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel controls.5
3 Press AUTO/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/STREAM
DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start
playback of the source.6
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
Note
1 If you’re using the front panel display, the diagram in Listening to Surround Sound on page 8 indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed.
2 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38 for more on this.
3 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings.
You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 47.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting
the settings manually.
4 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV, make sure that the
VIDEO 1 input is now selected).
5 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 32).
6 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and
88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to a
multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 29 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.
10
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
11 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
5 minute guide
02
• See also Listening to your system on page 29 for
information on different ways of listening to sources.
Phase Control ON
Front speaker
It is possible to check on the display whether or not multichannel playback is being performed properly.
When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PL IIx
MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals,
and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1channel signals.
When not using a surround back speaker, DOLBY
DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals.
4 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Better sound using Phase Control
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase
correction measures to make sure your sound source
arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing
unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound (see
illustration below).
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency
Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each
channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the
subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in
theory, however, this type of processing involves a group
delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase
distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or
muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the
Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can
reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the
quality of the original sound (see illustration below).
Sound
source
Listening
position
Original sound
preserved with no
loss of clarity
Subwoofer
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity
• Bass sound with no loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound
reproduction through the use of phase matching1 for an
optimal sound image at your listening position. The
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase
Control switched on for all sound sources.
THX
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
• Press RECEIVER, then press PHASE (PHASE
CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.
Phase Control OFF
Front speaker
Sound
source
Listening
position
Subwoofer
Sound muffled due
to a delay in time
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear
• Bass sound with loss of depth
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality
Note
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together,
resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram
above), then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set
to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the
orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 69.
11
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
03
12 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
Chapter 3:
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Rear panel
1
HDMI
2
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
OUT
4
8
SVIDEO IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
11 12 13
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
16
MONITOR
OUT
ANTENNA
Y
VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
PB FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
RS-232C
IN 2
(CD)
DVD
BD IN
3
OPTICAL
IN 1
IN 1
AUDIO
IN
5
CON- IN
TROL
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
OUT
L
6
9
IN
(DVR2)
IN
IN
OUT
15
FRONT
CENTER
(Single) PRE OUT
MULTI CH IN
10
SPEAKERS
R
A
CD
FRONT
CD-R
CENTER
L
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
R
L
R
SURROUND BACK / B
L
(Single)
OUT
OUT
DIGITAL
7
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
1
L
12 V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
R
SUBWOOFER
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
1 HDMI connectors (x4)
Three inputs and one output for high-quality audio/video
connection to compatible HDMI devices.
 See Connecting using HDMI on page 15.
2 Coaxial digital audio inputs (x2)
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.
 See also The Input Setup menu on page 65 to assign
the inputs.
3 Optical digital audio output/input(s) (x4)
Use the OUT jack for recording to a CD or MiniDisc
recorder.
 See Connecting digital audio sources on page 18.
Use the IN jacks for digital audio sources, including DVD
players/recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players,
etc.
 See also The Input Setup menu on page 65 to assign
the inputs.
4 RS-232C connector
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when
using Advanced MCACC.
 See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on
page 62.
En
14
R
IR
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
12
PR
ZONE 2
IN
OUT
ZONE2
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN
(TV SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN 2
TV SAT
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
5 Control input/output
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote
sensor.
 See Operating other Pioneer components with this
receiver’s sensor on page 77.
6 Remote input/output (MULTI-ZONE)
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.
 See Connecting an IR receiver on page 59.
7 12 V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)
Use to switch components in your system on and off
according to the input function of the receiver.
 See Switching components on and off using the 12
volt trigger on page 60.
8 Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x6)
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks
for composite video, S-Video and stereo analog audio.
 See Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other
video sources on page 17.
9 Multichannel analog audio inputs
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with
multichannel analog outputs.
 See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on
page 55.
VSX-LX51_HY.book
13 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
03
10 Speaker terminals
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround
and surround back speakers.
 See Installing your speaker system on page 20.
11 Composite and S-Video monitor outputs
Use to connect monitors and TVs.
 See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 16.
12 ZONE 2 audio/video outputs
Use to connect a second receiver in a separate room.
 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 57.
13 Component video connections (x4)
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has
component video output, such as a DVD recorder. Use
the output for connection to a monitor or TV.
 See Using the component video jacks on page 18.
14 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,
tape decks, turntables, etc.
 See Connecting analog audio sources on page 19.
15 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs
Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center,
surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.
 See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 57 (see
also Installing your speaker system on page 20 for
powered subwoofer connection).
16 AM and FM antenna terminals
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio
broadcasts.
 See Connecting antennas on page 22.
13
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
When making cable connections
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the
top of the receiver.
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter
protecting the optical socket.
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video sources are
output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.
The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot
be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to
the receiver’s HDMI video outputs when connecting this
video source.1
If several video components are assigned to the same
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 65),
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, SVideo, then composite (in that order).
Terminal for connection
with source device
High picture quality
03
14 ページ
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
Y
Y
PB
PB
PR
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S-VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
Video signals can be output
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 70) OFF.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology
must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Note
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video
options on page 70) OFF.
• The ZONE 2 video input can also be converted. For details, see Setting the Video options on page 70.
14
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
15 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped
component, you can connect it to this receiver using a
commercially available HDMI cable.1
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the
connected component is compatible with, including
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See
About the video converter on page 14 for more on HDMI
compatibility.
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or
flat screen TV
HDMI IN
HDMI
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
OUT
VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
RS-232C
2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT
interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect
on an HDMI-compatible monitor.
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be
facing left for correct alignment with the connector
on the player.
3 Use the INPUT SELECT button to select the HDMI
input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).
You can also perform the same operation by using the
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options
on page 69 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI
audio output from your TV or flat screen TV (no sound
will be heard from this receiver).
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat
screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on
your component or display. Note that some
components (such as video game units) have
resolutions that may not be converted. In this case,
use an analog video connection.
IN 2
(CD)
DVD
BD IN
OPTICAL
IN 1
IN 1
AUDIO
IN
CON- IN
TROL
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR
L
OUT
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s
digital out jacks.
(TV SAT)
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
IR
ZONE2
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN 3
SPEA
A
(DVR2)
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
DIGITAL
L
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
R
SUBWOOFER
VSX-LX51
HDMI/DVI-equipped component
HDMI OUT
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN
interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on
your HDMI component.
The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an
HDMI-equipped component is connected.
About HDMI
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the
technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include
uncompressed digital video, one connector (instead of
several cables and connectors), and communication
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
Note
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection
(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support
audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components
that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure
that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
15
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
03
16 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your TV and DVD player
VIDEO
IN
TV
4 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD
player to the DVD AUDIO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.
S-VIDEO
IN
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,
you can connect these instead. See also Connecting
the multichannel analog inputs on page 55.
1
VSX-LX51
HDMI
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
3 Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on
your DVD player to the COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD) input.
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
OU
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
OUT
VIDEO
IN 1
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player
(DVD)
RS-232C
IN 2
(CD)
DVD
BD IN
OPTICAL
IN 1
CON- IN
TROL
IN 1
(TV SAT)
TV SAT
AUDIO
IN
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
ZON
IN
OU
VSX-LX51
L
OUT
HDMI
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN 3
FRONT
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
OU
VIDEO
IN 1
RS-232C
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
IN 2
(CD)
1
DIGITAL
OUT
(DVD)
(DVR2)
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
IN
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
SPEAKERS
R
A
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN 2
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
IR
ZONE2
DVD
BD IN
L
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
OPTICAL
R
IN 1
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
IN
CON- IN
TROL
IN 1
(TV SAT)
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
ZON
IN
OU
L
OUT
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
IR
ZONE2
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN 3
SPEAKERS
R
A
FRONT
(DVR2)
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
DIGITAL
L
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
R
SUBWOOFER
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
3
S-VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
2
R
AUDIO L
ANALOG OUT
4
HDMI OUT
DVD player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a TV and DVD player, with S-Video or composite
video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may
offer alternative connections. See also Using the
component video jacks on page 18 if your TV and/or DVD
player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD
player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 55.
Blu-ray disc player
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together
with a Blu-ray disc player, with HDMI connections. If your
Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog audio
outputs, see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
on page 55.
• Connect an HDMI output on your Blu-ray disc
player to the BD HDMI input.
Connect using an HDMI cable.
1 Connect the MONITOR OUT video jack to a video
input on your TV.
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to
the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use
an S-Video cable to connect to the S-Video jack.
2 Connect a composite or S-Video output on your
DVD player to the DVD VIDEO or DVD S-VIDEO input.
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-Video
cable.
Note
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set
up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 65).
16
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
17 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR
and other video sources
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and
outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video
devices, including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.
VSX-LX51
HDMI
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VSX-LX51
OU
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
HDMI
OUT
VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
OUT
IN 2
(CD)
DVD
BD IN
OPTICAL
IN 1
TV SAT
AUDIO
IN
CON- IN
TROL
IN 1
(TV SAT)
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
ZON
IN
OUT
OPTICAL
IR
IN 1
SPEAKERS
R
A
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
OU
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
ZON
IN
OU
L
OUT
FRONT
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
IR
ZONE2
FRONT
IN 2
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
L
12V TRIGGER
SPEAKERS
R
A
MULTI CH IN
IN
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
DVD
AUDIO
IN
CON- IN
TROL
IN 1
(TV SAT)
OUT
DIGITAL
OUT
RS-232C
(CD)
IN 3
(DVR2)
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
IN
IN 2
BD IN
L
ZONE2
IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
OUT
VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
OU
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
IN
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
RS-232C
IN 3
FRONT
(DVR2)
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
R
SUBWOOFER
DIGITAL
L
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
R
SUBWOOFER
DIGITAL OUT
R AUDIO L
AV OUT
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COAXIAL OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
R AUDIO L
3
VIDEO S-VIDEO
AV IN
R AUDIO L
VIDEO S-VIDEO
AV OUT
1
2
STB
1 Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top
box to the TV SAT AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a
video or S-Video cable.
2 Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output from
your set-top box to the OPTICAL IN 1 (TV SAT) input.2
Use an optical cable for the connection.
DVR, VCR, etc.
1 Connect the audio/video outputs of the video
player/recorder to the DVR1 AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-Video cable for the video
connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR2 IN inputs.
2 If the device can record, connect the DVR1 AUDIO
and VIDEO outputs to the recorder’s audio/video
inputs.
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio
connection and a video or S-Video cable for the video
connection.
• For a second recorder, use the DVR2 OUT outputs.
Note
1 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 65).
2 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
17
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
03
18 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
3 If the device can output digital audio, connect an
optical-type1 digital audio output from the recorder to
the OPTICAL IN 2 (DVR1) input.
Use an optical cable for the connection.2
• For a second recorder, use the OPTICAL IN 3 (DVR2)
inputs.
Using the component video jacks
Component video should give superior picture quality
when compared to composite or S-Video. You can also
take advantage of progressive scan video (if your source
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable,
flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your
TV and source component to check whether they are
compatible with progressive-scan video.
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which
component video inputs you use for which source.
After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the
component video inputs—see The Input Setup menu
on page 65.
2 Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks to the component video inputs on your TV or
monitor.
Use a three-way component video cable.
Connecting digital audio sources
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs,
allowing you to connect digital audio components for
playback and for making digital recordings.
Y
PB
Most digital components also have analog connections.
See Connecting analog audio sources on page 19 if you
want to connect these too.
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV
1 Connect the component video outputs of your
source to a set of ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
inputs.
Connect using a three-way component video cable.
2
VSX-LX51
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
MONITOR
OUT
ANTENNA
HDMI
Y
MO
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
PB FM UNBAL 75
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
PR
ZONE 2
IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
FRONT
AM LOOP
OUT
CENTER
IN 2
(Single) PRE OUT
(CD)
IN 1
CD
SPEAKERS
R
A
FRONT
CD-R
CENTER
L
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
R
L
R
SURROUND BACK / B
AUDIO
IN
CON- IN
TROL
IN 1
(TV SAT)
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
L
OUT
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
L
IR
ZONE2
(Single)
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN 2
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
DVD
BD IN
OPTICAL
TI CH IN
VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
RS-232C
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN 3
SPEAKERS
R
A
F
(DVR2)
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
DIGITAL
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
L
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
R
SUBWOOFER
VSX-LX51
Y
PB
PR
1
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
2
DVD player
COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT
1
CD-R, MD,
DAT, etc.
Note
1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.
2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 65).
18
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
19 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
03
1 Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on
your digital component to the COAXIAL IN 2 (CD)
input.
Use a coaxial cable for the connection.
2 For recording equipment, connect the optical-type
DIGITAL output to a digital input on the recorder.
Use an optical cable to connect to the OPTICAL OUT.2
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This receiver has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9
Professional3 (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or
optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital
output.
• Connect the analog audio outputs of the source
component to one of the AUDIO inputs.
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,
connect the analog audio outputs (OUT) to the
analog audio inputs on the recorder.
Connecting a component to the front
panel inputs
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack
(VIDEO), stereo analog audio inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an
optical digital audio input (DIGITAL IN). You can use
these connections for any kind of audio/video
component, but they are especially convenient for
portable equipment such as camcorders, video games
and portable audio/video equipment.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
front video connections.
Connecting analog audio sources
This receiver features two stereo audio-only inputs. One
of these inputs (CD-R) has corresponding outputs for use
with audio recorders.
VIDEO
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO
IN
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
MONITOR
OUT
ANTENNA
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
PUSH
OPEN
PHONES
OUT
VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO R
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
L
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO R
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
+
Y
PB FM UNBAL 75
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
PR
ZONE 2
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
FRONT
AM LOOP
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
(Single) PRE OUT
CENTER
VIDEO OUTPUT
CD
I CH IN
SPEAKERS
R
A
FRONT
CD-R
CENTER
L
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
R
L
R
SURROUND BACK / B
L
(Single)
DIGITAL OUT
TV game, video camera, etc.
• Select these inputs by pressing VIDEO or using
INPUT SELECT (remote) to select VIDEO.
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
VSX-LX51
OUT
PLAY
IN
REC
R
L
AUDIO IN/OUT
Tape deck, etc.
Note
1 • If your digital component only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 65).
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up
the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 65).
2 In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources below.
3 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.
19
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
03
20 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
Installing your speaker system
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound capabilities connect front, center, surround and surround back
speakers, as well as a subwoofer.1 Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer speakers—no subwoofer or
no center speaker, or even no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front left and right speakers only are
necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just
one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal). You can use speakers
with a nominal impedance between 6 Ω and 16 Ω (please see Switching the speaker impedance on page 72 if you plan
to use speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
Front
left
Front
right
Center
Subwoofer
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
HDMI
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
MONITOR
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
OUT
ANTENNA
Y
VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
PB FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
RS-232C
IN 2
(CD)
DVD
BD IN
CON- IN
TROL
OPTICAL
IN 1
AUDIO
IN
IN 1
(TV SAT)
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR2
IN
OUT
PR
ZONE 2
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
FRONT
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
CENTER
(Single) PRE OUT
L
OUT
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
IR
CD
ZONE2
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN 3
(DVR2)
SPEAKERS
R
A
FRONT
CD-R
CENTER
L
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
R
L
R
SURROUND BACK / B
L
(Single)
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
DIGITAL
L
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
R
SUBWOOFER
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
VSX-LX51
Surround
left
Surround
right
Surround
back left
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to
match these up with the terminals on the speakers
themselves.
Surround
back right
Caution
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
Note
1 • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.
20
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
21 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
Bare wire connections
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is
properly prepared with about 10 mm of insulator stripped
from each wire, and the exposed wire strands twisted
together (fig. A).
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns
until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire
(fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal
until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).
fig. A
fig. B
fig. C
10 mm
Important
• Please refer to the manual that came with your
speakers for details on how to connect the other end
of the speaker cables to your speakers.
• Other connections on page 51 provides greater detail
on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker
system B (page 55), bi-amping and bi-wiring
(page 56).
03
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of
the front left and right speakers.
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.
• Surround and surround back speakers should be
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and
titled slight downward. Make sure the speakers don’t
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should
be more directly behind the listener than for home
theater playback.
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away
from the listening position than the front and center
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound
effect.
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install
your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers
are installed securely to prevent accidents and
improve sound quality.
Front
left
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the
THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your
subwoofer.
Placing the speakers
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers
2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend
using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent
possible interference, such as discoloration of the
picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have
magnetically shielded speakers and notice
discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers
farther away from the TV.
Front
right
Subwoofer
Surround
right
Surround
left
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the
other speakers should be at about ear-level when
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very
high on a wall is not recommended.
Center
Listening position
Surround back left
Surround back right
Single surround back speaker
Caution
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.
This not only improves sound quality, but also
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of
external shocks such as earthquakes.
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a
narrower angle.
21
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
03
22 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
The diagrams below show suggested surround and
surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig.
A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or
none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation
with two surround back speakers connected.
90° to 120°
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna
as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,
connect external antennas (see Connecting external
antennas on page 23).
fig. a
RS
LS
RS
LS
Connecting antennas
fig. b
fig. c
0° to 60°
RS
LS
SBL
SB
fig. A
SBL
SBR
3
SBR
fig. B
ANTENNA
5
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position (see below).
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
1
4
2
THX speaker system setup
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the
diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating
speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the
listener.
L
C
R
SL
SR
Surround
Surround
SBL
SBR
Surround back
• If you have two surround back speakers THX
recommends placing them together and the same
distance from your listening position for the following
THX modes: THX Select2 CINEMA, THX
MUSICMODE and THX GAMES MODE.
See also THX Audio Setting on page 50 to make the
settings that will give you the best sound experience
when using the Home THX modes (page 30).
22
En
1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna
wires.
2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into
each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM
antenna wires.
3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction
indicated by the arrow (fig. a), then clip the loop onto the
stand (fig. b).
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other
surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the
reception is clear.
4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a
direction giving the best reception.
5 Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as
the AM loop antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
VSX-LX51_HY.book
23 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Connecting your equipment
03
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception connect an external FM
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω terminal.
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the speakers.
Caution
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The
power cords should be routed so that they are not
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent
service company for a replacement.
75 Ω coaxial cable
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of
vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally
outdoors.
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular
use, e.g., when on vacation.
Outdoor antenna
• Make sure the blue  STANDBY/ON light has gone
out before unplugging.
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
•
Plug the power cord into a power outlet.
ANTENNA
5 m to 6 m
FM UNBAL 75
AM LOOP
23
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
24 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Controls and displays
04
Chapter 4:
Controls and displays
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
VSX-LX51
STANDBY/ON
PHASE
CONTROL
DVD
ADVANCED
MCACC
BD
TV
SAT
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DVR 1/DVR 2
VIDEO
HDMI 1/HDMI 2
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
CD
CD-R
FM/AM
HDMI
iPod USB
MULTI CH IN
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO
PHONES
11
SPEAKERS
ST
HOME
THX
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
13
STANDARD
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
14
7
ADVANCED
SURROUND
ST
–
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO R
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
8
9
10
STEREO/
A.L.C.
ST
+
15
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER indicator – Lights when
Resolution is set to a setting other than PURE (for
example, when the video input signal is upscaled)
(page 69).
1 INPUT SELECTOR dial
Use to select an input source.
2  STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power
indicator lights when the receiver is on.
3 Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 25).
4
L
+
12
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
PHASE CONTROL indicator – Lights when the Phase
Control is switched on (page 11).
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when one of
the MCACC presets (page 32) is selected.1
DIGITAL PRECISION PROCESSING indicator –
Lights to indicate digital processing (for example, it
disappears when Pure Direct (page 32) is on, or when
listening through the multichannel analog inputs).
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMIequipped component; lights when the component is
connected (page 63).
5 MULTI CH IN
Press to select the multichannel analog inputs (page 55).
6
MASTER VOLUME dial
7 Input source buttons
Press to select an input source.
8 VIDEO INPUT
See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on
page 19.
9 iPod DIRECT USB terminal
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source
(page 51), or connect a USB audio device for playback
(page 53).
Note
1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional or when EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter menu (see Setting the Audio options on page 69).
24
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
25 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Controls and displays
04
10 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone.
11 PHONES jack
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
12 Listening mode buttons
AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT – Switches between
Auto surround mode (Auto playback on page 29) and
Stream Direct playback. Stream Direct playback
bypasses the bass/treble controls for the most
accurate reproduction of a source (page 32).
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
mode (page 30).
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard
decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 29).
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between
the various surround modes (page 30).
STEREO/A.L.C. – Switches between stereo playback,
Auto level control stereo mode and Front Stage
Surround Advance modes (page 31).
13 MULTI-ZONE controls
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTIZONE listening on page 57), use these controls to control
the sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTIZONE controls on page 58).
14 SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 55).
15 ST +/–
Use to select preset radio stations (page 35).
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
• There are obstacles between the remote control and
the receiver’s remote sensor.
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the
remote sensor.
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting
infrared rays.
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another
infrared remote control unit.
STAND
BY/ON
30°
30°
7m
25
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
26 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Controls and displays
04
Display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
10 11
12
TUNED RDS
PHASE CONTROL DNR
L
C
R 2DIGITAL 2HD
DTS WMA9 Pro MULTI-ZONE DIALOG E ATT OVER STEREO EON
MONO
SL S SR
DSD PCM S.RTRV SOUND
V.SB
HDMI
SBL SB SBR
DIGITAL
VIDEO
CD
DVD TV
USB
TUNER
LFE
ANALOG
[2]
13
AUTO
PCM
CD-R
iPod
BDP DVR
HDMI
dB
SR+
[1]
STREAM DIRECT
Neo : 6
2PRO LOGIC
THX ADV.SURROUND
STEREO STANDARD
SLEEP
SP AB
14
15
16
17
18
10 EON/RDS indicators
EON – Lights when the EON mode is set (flashes
during EON reception). The indicator lights when
the current station carries the EON service (page 37).
2 Program format indicators
These change according to which channels are active in
digital sources.
RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received
(page 36).
3 Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format
is detected (DSDPCM lights during the DSD (Direct
Stream Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs).
4 S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever is switched on
(page 69).
5 MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 57).
6 PHASE CONTROL
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 11).
7 Sound processing indicators
Light according to the active Audio parameter(s)
(page 69) and/or ANALOG ATT (page 72).
8 V.SB
Lights during Virtual surround back processing (page 33).
9
En
20
1 SIGNAL indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input
signal automatically (page 32).
L – Left front channel
C – Center channel
R – Right front channel
SL – Left surround channel
S – Surround channel (mono)
SR – Right surround channel
SBL – Left surround back channel
SB – Surround back channel (mono)
SBR – Right surround back channel
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when
an LFE signal is being input)
26
19
TUNER indicators
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
11 SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or bass/treble
controls feature is selected (page 69).
12 Master volume level
13 SR+
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 61).
14 STREAM DIRECT
Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 32).
15 Speaker indicators
Indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B (page 55).
16 Listening mode indicators
THX – Lights when a Home THX mode is selected.
ADV. SURROUND – Lights when an Advanced
Surround mode has been selected (page 30).
STEREO – Lights when the stereo mode is selected
(page 31).
STANDARD – Lights when a Standard Surround
mode is switched on (see Listening in surround
sound on page 29).
17 SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 72).
18 Matrix decoding format indicators
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro
Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 29).
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing
(page 29).
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is
being received in auto stereo mode.
19 Character display
Displays various system information.
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using
the MPX button.
20 Input source indicators
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.
VSX-LX51_HY.book
27 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Controls and displays
04
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV,
and also to select a disc in a multi-CD player.
Remote control
Press RECEIVER first to access:
12
RECEIVER
1
2
13
DVD
BD
TV
DVR 1
DVR 2
CD
HDMI
CD-R
FM/AM
iPod USB
INPUT
SELECT
3
DIMMER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
4
CH
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and
select the amount of time before sleep (page 72).
14
VOL
MUTE
15
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER
EXIT
5
TOOLS
TUNE
TOP MENU
MENU
T.EDIT
6
ENTER
ST
SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 61).
SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back
channel mode (page 33).
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog
input signal to prevent distortion (page 72).
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,
then use / to adjust the level (page 48).
ST
PTY
SEARCH
GENRE – Automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source
currently being played back (this feature is available
only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control is connected to this receiver via HDMI)
(page 34).
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets
(page 32).
9
TV CONTROL
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the input source.
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 72).
SOURCE
RETURN
Press FM/AM first to access:
SETUP TUNE
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio
station directly using the number buttons (page 35).
iPod CTRL
7
AUTO/
DIRECT
HDD
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
8
9
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
10
11
CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes)
of radio station presets (page 35).
DVD
THX
16
17
MAIN
ZONE 2
4 TV CONTROL buttons
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to
the TV CTRL button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook
up to this system assign it to the TV CTRL input source
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV
CTRL button (see page 76 for more on this).
TV – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
RECEIVER
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according
to component control using the following system (press
the corresponding input source button to access):
• White – Receiver controls (see below)
• Blue – Other controls (page 76)
1 RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
2 Input source buttons
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system on page 74).
3 Number buttons and other receiver/component
controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio
frequency (page 35) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.
CH +/– – Use to select channels.
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.
5 Tuner/component control buttons/SETUP
These button controls can be accessed after you have
selected the corresponding input source button (DVD,
DVR1, TV, etc.). The T.EDIT and PTY SEARCH tuner
controls are explained from page 35.
Press RECEIVER first to access:
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio
options (page 69).
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video
options (page 70).
SETUP – Use to access the System Setup menu
(page 38).
27
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
28 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Controls and displays
04
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).
6 /// (TUNE/ST) /ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround
sound system (page 38) and the Audio or Video options
(page 69 or 70). Also used to control DVD menus/options
and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use the
TUNE / buttons to find radio frequencies and use ST
/ to find preset stations (page 35).
7 Receiver controls
Press RECEIVER first to access:
AUTO/DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround
(page 29) or Stream Direct (page 32) listening.
STEREO/A.L.C. – Switches between the stereo
playback mode and the Front Stage Surround
Advance mode (page 31).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and
Neo:6 options (page 29).
ADV SURR – Use to switch among the various
surround modes (page 30).
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode
(page 30).
8 Component control buttons
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a
component after you have selected it using the input
source buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input source button
(for example DVD, DVR1 or TV). These buttons also
function as described below.
Press RECEIVER first to access:
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings
(page 72).
PHASE – Press to switch on/off Phase Control
(page 11).
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 32).
Press FM/AM first to access:
EON – Use to search for programs that are
broadcasting traffic or news information (page 37).
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak then switching
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 35).
9
AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD
discs.
DISPLAY – Switches between named station presets
and radio frequencies (page 36). Also used to display
RDS information (page 36).
CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/DVR units.
28
En
10 TV CTRL
Use this button to set preset code of your TV’s
manufacturer when controlling TV (see Selecting preset
codes directly on page 74 for more on this).
11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch
Switch to perform operations in the main zone and zone
2 (page 57).
12 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.
13 SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the
receiver (see page 74 for more on this).
14 MASTER VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
15 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
16 Remote control illumination button
Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the
buttons. This function is convenient when operating in
dark rooms.
17 RECEIVER
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to
select the white commands above the number buttons
(A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this button to set up surround
sound (page 9, page 38).
VSX-LX51_HY.book
29 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Listening to your system
05
Chapter 5:
Listening to your system
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using
surround back channel processing on page 33.
Important
• The listening modes and many features described in
this section may not be available depending on the
current source, settings and status of the receiver.
See Listening modes with different input signal
formats on page 90 for more on this.
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround sound for
stereo and multichannel sources.3
AUTO/
DIRECT
HDD
Auto playback
THX
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.1
AUTO/
DIRECT
HDD
THX
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press AUTO/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT)2
for auto playback of a source.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see
how the source is being processed.
• When listening to the FM Radio, the Neural THX
feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural
THX on page 35 for more on this).
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in
surround sound. However, the options available will
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source
you’re listening to.
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround
encoded, the proper decoding format will
automatically be selected and shows in the display.4
With two channel sources, you can select from:
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to movie sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources5
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to video games
• 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound
from the surround speakers is mono)
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 6.1 channel sound, especially
suited to movie sources
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited
to music sources6
• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially
suited to music sources7
With multichannel sources, if you have connected
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you
can select (according to format):
Note
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound above
for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 32.
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.
4 If surround back channel processing (page 33) is switched off, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Surround
back speaker setting on page 41 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH, DIMENSION, and
PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 69 to adjust them.
6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options
on page 69).
7 Neural THX can be selected when the input signal is an analog, PCM signal or FM input.
29
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
05
30 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Listening to your system
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available
when you’re using two surround back speakers)
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See page 29
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital
Surround EX)
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS-ES encoded sources
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
with DTS encoded sources
Using the Home THX modes
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like
what you hear in a cinema.
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• THX SELECT2 MUSIC – This mode is suited not only
for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but
also to all multi-channel music sources (DVD-Audio,
etc.).
• THX SELECT2 GAMES – This mode is suited to
playing the sound of games.
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced
Surround modes are designed to be used with film
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks
to see which you like.
AUTO/
DIRECT
HDD
THX
Different THX options will be available depending on the
source and the setting for surround back channel
processing (see Using surround back channel processing
on page 33 for more on this).
THX
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
• Press RECEIVER, then press THX (HOME THX) to
select a listening mode.1
With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select
a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode
(see Listening in surround sound on page 29 for an
explanation of each process):
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
• Press RECEIVER, then press ADV SURR
(ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a
listening mode.2
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic
soundtracks
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of
special effects
• MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono
soundtracks
• ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
• 2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA
• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field3
• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA
• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both
mono and stereo TV sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES
• THX SELECT2 GAMES
With multichannel sources, press THX (HOME THX)
repeatedly to select from:
• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock
and/or pop music
• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources
• EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo
source, using all of your speakers
• THX SELECT2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources
Note
1 If you only have one surround back speaker connected, THX SELECT2 GAMES is not available.
2 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. See Using
surround back channel processing on page 33 for more on this.
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURROUND mode will automatically be selected.
3 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).
30
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
31 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Listening to your system
• PHONES SURROUND – When listening through
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall
surround.
Tip
05
Using Front Stage Surround Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to
create natural surround sound effects using just the front
speakers and the subwoofer.
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 69.
AUTO/
DIRECT
HDD
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source
through just the front left and right speakers (and
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.
In the Auto level control stereo mode (A.L.C.), this
receiver equalizes playback sound levels if each sound
level varies with the music source recorded in a portable
audio player.
HDD
THX
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
DVD
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
Listening in stereo
AUTO/
DIRECT
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
THX
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press STEREO/A.L.C. for stereo playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
• While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press STEREO/A.L.C. to select Front Stage Surround
Advance modes.
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• A.L.C. – See Listening in stereo above for more on
this.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround
sound effect directed to the center of where the front
left and right speakers sound projection area
converges.
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.1
FOCUS position
(Recommended)
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
WIDE position
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround
settings and you can still use the Midnight,
Loudness, and bass/treble controls.
• A.L.C. – Listening in Auto level control stereo mode.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround
Advance below for more on this.
Note
1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if Auto MCACC Setup is performed. See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 9 for more on this.
31
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
05
32 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Listening to your system
Using Stream Direct
Selecting MCACC presets
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the
pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct
with different input signal formats on page 94).
AUTO/
DIRECT
HDD
THX
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
• Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different listening
positions2, you can switch between settings to suit the
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a
video game close to the TV).
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
1 While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press AUTO/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT) to
select the mode you want.
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel
display to see how the source is being processed.
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
9
MAIN
ZONE 2
• While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then
press MCACC.
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets3
or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on
page 46 to check and manage your current settings.
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 29.
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual
mono, the input attenuator, any sound delay and hibit settings. You will hear sources according to the
number of channels in the signal.
• PURE DIRECT – Analog and PCM sources are heard
without any digital processing.1 No sound is output
from the Second Zone in this mode.
Choosing the input signal
You need to hook up a component to both analog and
digital inputs on the receiver to select between input
signals.4
THX
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
• Press RECEIVER, then press SIGNAL SEL to select
the input signal corresponding to the source
component.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
• AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.
Note
1 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem.
2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These presets
can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 9 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38, either of which you should
have already completed.
3 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.
4 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz/24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. The
compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA 9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz sampling frequencies), Dolby
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to
ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN and FM/AM).
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections
(page 18) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.
32
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
33 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Listening to your system
05
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.1
• PCM – Only PCM signals are output.
• Press RECEIVER, then press SBch repeatedly to
cycle the surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
2
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2 DIGITAL lights with
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding, 2 HD
lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding, DTS lights with DTS
or DTS-HD decoding, and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate
that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.
• SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for
example, a surround back channel will be generated
for 5.1 encoded material)
Using surround back channel
processing
• SBch OFF – No sound is output from the surround
back speakers
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode
• Default setting: SBch ON
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back
channel will be generated, but the material may sound
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround
back channel processing off).
The table below indicates when you will hear the
surround back channel when playing various kinds of
sources (=Sound plays through surround back
speaker(s)).
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
9
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
MPX
ENTER
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
SIGNAL SEL
CH
The table indicates when you will hear the virtual
surround back channel (=Virtual surround back
channel is active).
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)
RECEIVER
MAIN
When you’re not using surround back speakers,
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround
back channel through your surround speakers. You can
choose to listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds better in
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.3
• Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual surround
back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
CLASS
0
• SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)
ZONE 2
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is
switched off
Type of source
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES 5.1 ch
sources with 6.1 ch flagged
Dolby Digital/DTS/SACD and DVDAudio 5.1 ch sources
Standard / THX
SBch
Processing /
Stereo sources
Virtual SB Multichannel
sources
mode
2 Pro Logic IIx 2 Pro Logic
Advanced
surround
Neo:6
ON


AUTO


ON


AUTO
c

Note
1 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 69 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.
2 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
3 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front Stage
Surround Advance, Auto level control stereo or Stream Direct mode is selected.
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on page 48.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
33
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
05
34 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Listening to your system
Standard / THX
SBch
Processing /
Stereo sources
Virtual SB Multichannel
sources
mode
2 Pro Logic IIx 2 Pro Logic
Type of source
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM/SACD/WMA9
Pro and DVD-Audio stereo sources
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/Dolby
Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro
encoded and PCM 6.1 ch/7.1 ch
sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/
WMA9 Pro encoded and PCM 5.1 ch
sources
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/
DTS-EXPRESS encoded 5.1 ch
sources
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD
encoded stereo sources
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/
DTS-EXPRESS encoded stereo
sources
ON

AUTO
b
ON

AUTO
b
a
a
Advanced
surround
Neo:6








ON

d
AUTO

d
ON

d
AUTO
c
d
ON
e
d
AUTO
e
d
ON

AUTO
b
a
d
d
ON
AUTO
a.Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
b.Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.
c.Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when THX SELECT2 CINEMA, THX SELECT2 MUSIC or THX SELECT2 GAMES is selected.
d.Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal.
e. Only applicable when two surround back speakers are connected. Also, depending on the input signal, it may happen that no sound is output from the
surround back speakers.
Using the genre synchronizing function
This feature automatically selects the most appropriate
Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being
played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI
Control connected to this receiver via HDMI.1 For details
on HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 63.
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
1 Press RECEIVER, then press GENRE while the source
assigned to a genre is being played back.
The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the
source being played back is automatically selected.
CH
RECEIVER
9
MAIN
ZONE 2
Note
1 • This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre. When the source has no genre assigned to, NO GENRE appears
showing that this feature is not available.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to ON. When OFF is selected, CANNOT SELECT appears showing that this feature is not available (see Setting the
HDMI options on page 63).
34
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
35 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Using the tuner
06
Chapter 6:
Using the tuner
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 89 for more on
this.
Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving
station presets below for more on how to do this.
FM/AM
iPod USB
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
INPUT
SELECT
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
1
DIMMER
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
9
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TUNE
TOOLS
AUTO/
DIRECT
HDD
THX
TOP MENU
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
Press the FM/AM button to select the tuner.
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RETURN
SETUP TUNE
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on
the remote control.
1
DVD
ST
TV CTRL
Tuning directly to a station
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
MENU
T.EDIT
ST
The Neural THX mode can be selected also with the
STANDARD button.
2 Use the FM/AM button to change the band (FM or
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
RECEIVER
iPod CTRL
Press the FM/AM button to select the tuner.
2 Use the FM/AM button to change the band (FM or
AM), if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).
4 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of
the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
3 Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning
To search for stations in the currently selected band,
press and hold TUNE / for about a second. The
receiver will start searching for the next station,
stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for
other stations.
Manual tuning
To change the frequency one step at a time, press
TUNE /.
High speed tuning
Press and hold TUNE / for high speed tuning.
Release the button at the frequency you want.
Improving FM stereo sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don’t light when
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
the MPX button to switch the receiver into mono
reception mode. This should improve the sound quality
and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.
Using Neural THX
This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX® technology to
achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/DIRECT for
Neural THX listening.
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This
receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three
banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When
saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see above) is
also stored.
THX
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
9
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
AUDIO
PARAMETER
EXIT
TOP MENU
ST
TOOLS
MENU
T.EDIT
ENTER
DTV/TV
EON
PHASE
AUDIO
DISPLAY
PTY
SEARCH
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
ST
TV CTRL
TV CONTROL
STATUS
VIDEO
PARAMETER
TUNE
RECEIVER
RETURN
SETUP TUNE
i
1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio above for more on this.
2 Press T.EDIT (Tuner Edit).
The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking
memory class.
3 Press CLASS to select one of the three classes, then
press ST / to select the station preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station
preset.
35
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
36 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Using the tuner
06
4 Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop
blinking and the receiver stores the station.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station
presets.
1 Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.
2 Press T.EDIT (Tuner Edit).
The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking
cursor at the first character position.
3 Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a name up to
four characters long.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>[email protected][ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,
and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Tip
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3
and input four spaces instead of a name.
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press
DISPLAY when listening to a station to switch the
display between name and frequency.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See
Saving station presets on page 35 if you haven’t done this
already.
1
Press FM/AM to select the tuner.
2 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station
is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.
An introduction to RDS
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information—the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
You can search the following program types:1
NEWS – News
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs
INFO – General Information
SPORT – Sport
EDUCATE – Educational
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE – National or
regional culture, theater, etc.
SCIENCE – Science and
technology
VARIED – Usually talk-based
material, such as quiz shows
or interviews.
POP M – Pop music
ROCK M – Rock music
EASY M – Easy listening
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical
music
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical
music
OTHER M – Music not fitting
above categories
WEATHER – Weather reports
FINANCE – Stock market
reports, commerce, trading,
etc.
CHILDREN – Programs for
children
SOCIAL – Social affairs
RELIGION – Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN – Public expressing
their views by phone
TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel
rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE – Leisure interests
and hobbies
JAZZ – Jazz
COUNTRY – Country music
NATION M – Popular music in
a language other than English
OLDIES – Popular music from
the ’50s and ’60s
FOLK M – Folk music
DOCUMENT – Documentary
Searching for RDS programs
One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to
search for a particular kind of radio program. You can
search for any of the program types listed above.
PARAMETER
EXIT
DVR 1
3 Press ST / to select the station preset you
want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote
control to recall the station preset.
DVR 2
CD
FM/AM
iPod USB
INPUT
SELECT
1
CD-R
DIMMER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
PARAMETER
TUNE
TOP MENU
MENU
T.EDIT
ENTER
ST
PTY
SEARCH
THX
STATUS
PHASE
TOOLS
ST
RETURN
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
SETUP TUNE
iPod CTRL
Press FM/AM to select the FM band.2
2 Press the PTY SEARCH button.
SEARCH shows in the display.
Note
1 In addition, there are three other program types, ALARM, NO DATA and NO TYPE. ALARM is used for emergency announcements. You can’t search
for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO DATA and NO TYPE appears when a program type cannot be found.
2 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
36
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
37 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Using the tuner
3 Press ST / to select the program type you want
to hear.
4 Press ENTER to search for the program type.
The system starts searching through the station presets
for a match. When it finds one, the search stops and the
station plays for five seconds.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press
ENTER within the five seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find
that program type at the time of the search.1
06
Using EON
When EON (Enhanced Other Network information) is
turned on, the receiver jumps to an EON-linked
broadcast when it begins, even if a receiver function
other than the tuner is being used. It can’t be used in
areas that EON information isn’t transmitted and when
FM broadcast stations don’t transmit PTY data. When the
broadcast ends, the tuner returns to the original
frequency or function.
DVR 1
INPUT
SELECT
Use the DISPLAY button to display the different types of
RDS information available.2
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
station.
• Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
• Current tuner frequency.
CD
FM/AM
Displaying RDS information
• Press DISPLAY for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
DVR 2
1
DIRECT
A.L.C.
HDD
DVD
CD-R
THX
iPod USB
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
DIMMER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
TV CTRL
STANDARD ADV SURR
STATUS
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
Press FM/AM to select the FM band.3
2 Press EON to select one of the possible modes.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• EON TA (Traffic Announcement) – Sets the tuner to
pick up traffic information when it is broadcast.
• EON NEWS – Sets the tuner to pick up news when it
is broadcast.
• OFF – Switches off the EON feature.
When set to TA or NEWS, the EON indicator in the
display lights (it flashes when receiving an EON
broadcast).4 The indicator in the display lights when
the current station carries the EON service.5
Note
1 RDS searches station presets only. If no stations have been preset, or if the program type could not be found among the station presets NO PTY is
displayed. FINISH means the search is complete.
2 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see NO RADIO TEXT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the
PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
• In the PTY display, NO DATA or NO TYPE may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.
3 EON is only possible in the FM band.
4 You can’t search for traffic announcements and news at the same time.
5 • You cannot operate the T.EDIT and PTY SEARCH buttons while the EON indicator in the display is lit.
• If you want to change to a function other than the tuner when the EON indicator is flashing, press EON to turn EON off.
37
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
38 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
07
Chapter 7:
The System Setup menu
• Surround Back System – Specifies how you are
using your surround back speakers (see Surround
back speaker setting on page 41).
Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu
The following section shows you how to make detailed
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for
example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in
separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune
individual speaker system settings to your liking.
PARAMETER
EXIT
RECEIVER
SOURCE
PARAMETER
TUNE
TOOLS
TOP MENU
DVD
BD
TV
HDMI
ST
DVR 1
DVR 2
CD
CD-R
PTY
SEARCH
MENU
T.EDIT
ENTER
ST
AUDIO
iPod USB
RECEIVER
RETURN
SETUP TUNE
FM/AM
CH
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
MAIN
ZONE 2
iPod CTRL
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.1
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,
disconnect them.
2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
SETUP.2
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
• Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup
menu.
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.
• Manual MCACC – Fine tunes your speaker settings
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see
Manual MCACC setup on page 41).
• Data Management – Checks your MCACC presets
and manages them through copying, renaming or
deleting (see Data Management on page 46).
• Manual SP Setup – Specifies the size, number,
distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve
connected (see Manual speaker setup on page 47).
• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to
the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see
The Input Setup menu on page 65).
• Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup
menu on page 66).
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) on page 9, you can customize your setup
options below. You can calibrate your system differently
for up to six different MCACC presets3, which are useful
if you have different listening positions depending on the
type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa,
or playing a video game close to the TV).4
System Setup MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
Manual MCACC
Data Management
Manual SP Setup
Input Setup
Other Setup
:Exit
• Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 9 for a quick
and effective automatic surround setup. See
Automatic MCACC (Expert) below for a more detailed
setup.
Important
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved
during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.5
• The screen saver will automatically appear after three
minutes of inactivity.
Caution
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are
output at high volume.
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.
2 • Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC
before pressing SETUP.
• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod USB input source is selected (in either the main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2 to ON
(page 58), you can’t use the System Setup menu.
3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1–6 (or M1–6) until you rename them in Data Management on page 46.
4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.
5 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the CUSTOM setup screen (step 2).
38
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
39 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
07
• THX Speaker (only available when the Custom Menu
above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES if you
are using THX speakers (set all speakers to SMALL),
otherwise leave it set to NO.
1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the System Setup menu,
then press ENTER.
If the System Setup screen is not displayed, refer to
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on
page 38.
System Setup MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
• Stand.Wave Multi-Point (only available when the
Custom Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for which test
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration
for several seating positions in your listening area.8
Place the microphone at the reference point
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone
placement will be at your main listening position:
1.Auto MCACC
Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
Manual MCACC
Data Management
Manual SP Setup
Input Setup
Other Setup
Surround Back System
[
Normal
]
Save SYMMETRY to
[ M1.MEMORY 1
]
START
:Exit
ENTER:Start
:Cancel
2 Make sure ‘Normal’ is selected,1 select an MCACC
preset2, then select START.3
For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select
CUSTOM and set the following parameters using /:4
1.Auto MCACC
1.Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
[
Normal
]
Save SYMMETRY to
[ M1.MEMORY 1
3rd reference
point
1
2
1.Auto MCACC
SYMMETRY
Custom Menu
ALL
]
2nd reference
point
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro. & S-Wave
M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ
[ M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGN
[ M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker
[ NO
]
]
]
3
CUSTOM
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
ENTER:Next
:Return
[
START
ENTER:Start
]
:Return
• Custom Menu – The default is ALL (recommended),
but you can limit the system calibration to only one
setting (to save time) if you want.5 The available
options are ALL, Keep SP System,6 Speaker
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance and EQ
Pro. & S-Wave.
• EQ Type (only available when the Custom Menu
above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – This determines how
the frequency balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the
following three correction curves can be stored
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left
and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics. ALL CH ADJUST is a ‘flat’ setting where
all the speakers are set individually so no special
weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN7
sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker
settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and
right channels).
Main listening
position
When you’re finished settings the options, press
RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.
3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC
jack on the front panel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
L
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO R
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
+
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a
table or a chair.
4
Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically
detected every time you switch on the system. Make
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.
Note
1 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker setting
on page 41 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 3.
2 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can
rename it later in Data Management on page 46).
3 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and
FRONT ALIGN).
4 Select DEMO, and then press ENTER to activate the demo mode of Auto MCACC. In the demo mode, no settings are saved and no errors occur. When
the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.
5 • The EQ Pro. & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 44 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see
Setting the Audio options on page 69.
6 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 47) unchanged.
7 If you selected ALL as your Custom Menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN settings.
8 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.
39
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
07
40 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 10 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
5 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish
outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while
it’s doing this.
7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.
1.Auto MCACC
1.Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing …
Now Analyzing …
Surround
Speaker
Channel
Speaker
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This
may result in incorrect speaker settings.
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient
noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 10) and
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and
continue.
6 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in
the OSD.1
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the
actual speakers you have.
1.Auto MCACC
Now Analyzing …
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
Speaker YES/NO
1.Auto MCACC
(2/9)
(6/9)
Subwoofer Check
Analysis
System
Level
Distance
:Cancel
[ OK ]
[ OK ]
[
]
:Cancel
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• If you selected a Stand.Wave Multi-Point setup (in
step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd
and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at
your main listening position.
8 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press RETURN
to go back to the System Setup menu.
4a.MCACC Data Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Speaker
Channel
Speaker
Standing
Acoustic
Setting
Level
Distance
Wave
Cal EQ
CHECK!
[ OK ]
[
]
[
]
Front
[ YES
Center
[ YES
Surr
[ YES
SB
[ YES x 2
SW
[ YES
:Cancel
10
ENTER:Next
]
]
]
]
]
OK
:Cancel
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 7.
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the
power and check the speaker connections. If there
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /
to select the speaker and / to change the setting
(and number for surround back) and continue.
:Return
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the
System Setup menu (starting on page 38).2
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check
screen:
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers
you’ve connected (see page 48 for more on this)
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker
system (see page 48 for more on this)
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers
from the listening position (see page 49 for more on
this)3
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 43 for more on this)
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency
balance of your speaker system based on the
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 44
for more on this)
Note
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting in Custom Menu from the Auto MCACC CUSTOM menu.
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings.
You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 47.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting
the settings manually.
3 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround
sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
40
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
41 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
07
Press ENTER after you have finished checking each
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back
to the System Setup menu.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.
Caution
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at
high volume.
Important
Surround back speaker setting
• Default setting: Normal
There are several ways you can use the surround back
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a
normal home theater setup where they are used for the
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system
in another room.
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing
SETUP (step 2 in Making receiver settings from the
System Setup menu on page 38). When Manual
MCACC is selected while MCACC is set to OFF, the
selection screen for the MCACC memory appears.
Select a memory to adjust manually.
3.Manual MCACC
Select MCACC memory.
1 Select ‘Surround Back System’ from the System
Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 38 if you’re not already at this screen.
System Setup MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.Surround Back System
Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
Manual MCACC
Data Management
Manual SP Setup
Input Setup
Other Setup
Normal
Front
Center
Surr
SB
:
:
:
:
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
:Exit
2
:Finish
Select the surround back speaker setting.
• Normal – Select for normal home theater use with
surround back speakers in your main (speaker
system A) setup.
• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in
another room (see Speaker B setup on page 55).
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re biamping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your front
speakers on page 56).
• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B
speaker terminals for an independent system in
another zone (see MULTI-ZONE listening on page 57).
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,
you should have already completed Automatically setting
up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 9.
You only need to make these settings once (unless you
change the placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
:Cancel
ENTER:Next
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it
about ear level at your normal listening position.
Press SETUP to display the System Setup menu
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If
the microphone is connected while the System Setup
menu is not being displayed, the display will change
to the Auto MCACC setup menu. See Problems when
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 10 for notes
regarding high background noise levels and other
possible interference.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up
the volume to the middle position.
1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the System Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 38 if you’re not already at this screen.
System Setup MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.Manual MCACC
Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
Manual MCACC
Data Management
Manual SP Setup
Input Setup
Other Setup
:Exit
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Fine Channel Level
Fine SP Distance
Standing Wave
EQ Adjust
EQ Professional
:Return
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to
make these settings in order.
• Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the
overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine
Channel Level on page 42).
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on
page 42).
41
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
07
42 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing
Wave on page 43).
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
on page 43:
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels
(+/–10dB) as necessary.
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds
like both tones are the same volume, press  to confirm
and continue to the next channel.
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance
of your speaker system while listening to test tones
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 43).
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional on page 44).
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
You can achieve better surround sound by properly
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. The
following setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual
speaker setup on page 47.
1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual
MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3a.Fine Channel Level
Fine Channel Level
Fine SP Distance
Standing Wave
EQ Adjust
EQ Professional
Please wait...
R
L
R
C
SL
SR
L
+0.5dB
[ -1.5dB ] SBL [ -9.5dB ]
[ +1.0dB ] SBR [ +10.0dB ]
[ -9.5dB ] SW [ -1.5dB ]
[ +10.0dB ]
:Finish
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
Fine Channel Level
3.Manual MCACC
3a.Fine Channel Level
20
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Fine Speaker Distance
• Default setting: 3.00 m (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening
position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of
each speaker in 1 cm increments. The following setting
can help you make detailed adjustments that you may
not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 47.
CAUTION
Loud test tones will
be output.
:Return
:Cancel
2 Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
3.Manual MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3b.Fine SP Distance
Fine Channel Level
Fine SP Distance
Standing Wave
EQ Adjust
EQ Professional
:Return
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Ref.Ch
: L
3.00m
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
3a.Fine Channel Level
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Ref.Ch
: L
+0.5dB
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.
2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the
listening position.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance
as necessary.
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in
terms of speaker distance from 0.01 m to 9.00 m.
3b.Fine SP Distance
C
L
R
C
SL
SR
[
[
[
[
3b.Fine SP Distance
L
SBL
3.05m
2.81m]
1.92m]
2.23m]
2.34m]
SBL
SBR
SW
:Finish
42
En
[
[
SL
1.92m
1.83m]
2.34m]
:Finish
VSX-LX51_HY.book
43 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
07
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the
target channel. From the listening position, face the two
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
you and between your arm span.1
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,
press  to confirm and continue to the next channel.
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will
change depending on which speaker you select.
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply
use / to select it.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Standing Wave
• Default setting: ON2/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC
presets.3
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC
setup menu.
3.Manual MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave
Control.
• Filter Ch – Select the channel to which you will apply
the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and
subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).
• TRIM (only available when Filter Ch above is SW) –
Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate
for the difference in output post-filter).
• f / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where f
represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q
is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the
bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the
amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
• Default setting: ON2/0.0dB (all channels/bands)
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer
for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by
measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and
neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the
original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization
setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided
in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 9 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 38, you can also adjust these settings manually to get
a frequency balance that suits your tastes.4
1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
3.Manual MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Fine Channel Level
Fine SP Distance
Standing Wave
EQ Adjust
EQ Professional
:Return
2 Confirm that the MCACC preset shown in the display
is the one you want to adjust, then select START.
3c.Standing Wave
Fine Channel Level
Fine SP Distance
Standing Wave
EQ Adjust
EQ Professional
MCACC : M1. MEMORY 1
Filter Ch
TRIM
SW
[ +12.0dB]
No.
1
2
f [ 63 Hz ] [ 110 Hz ] [
Q [ 3.0 ] [ 8.0 ] [
ATT [ 2.5 dB ] [ 6.0 dB ] [
:Return
3
250 Hz ]
5.0 ]
6.0 dB ]
:Finish
3d.EQ Adjust
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
[ START ]
ENTER:Next
:Cancel
Note
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult to
compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave Control and Acoustic Cal EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio options on
page 69 for more on this.
3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
• When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where S-WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, S-WAVE ON is automatically
selected.
4 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ ON is automatically selected.
43
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
07
44 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
3 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your
liking.
3d.EQ Adjust
MCACC : M1
Ch
[SBL]
:Finish
TRM
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
16k
dB
63Hz
125Hz
250Hz
500Hz
1kHz
2kHz
4kHz
8kHz
16kHz
TRIM
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
0.0]
Use / to select the channel.
Use / to select the frequency and / to boost or
cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of
the screen and use / to select the next channel.
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until
OVER! disappears from the display.
Tip
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the
speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or
lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM
feature. Use / to select TRIM, then use / to
raise or lower the channel level for the current
speaker.
(with software available from Pioneer — see Connecting
a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 62).
How to interpret the graphical output
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this
usually takes about 100 ms or so).
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how
your room is responding to certain frequencies.
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are
taken into account automatically (compensation is
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency
measurements can be examined both with and without
the equalization performed by this receiver.2
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
according to your room characteristics
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing
the time that is best for system calibration with your
particular room characteristics.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
The graph below shows the difference between
conventional acoustic calibration and professional
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
Level
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It
can also provide you with a graphical output of the
frequency response of your room.1
Test tone
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
0
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb
characteristics, select EQ Pro. & S-Wave (or ALL) for the
Custom Menu setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 38 to calibrate the room automatically. This should
provide a balanced calibration that suits the
characteristics of your listening room.
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual
Advanced EQ setup (below) provides a more customized
calibration of your system using the direct sound of the
speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output
that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer
80
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time
160 (in msec)
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of
30~50ms to compensate for two major factors that will
influence the sound of most rooms:
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –
Depending on your room, you may find that lower
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the
measurement is done too late.
Note
1 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer
(with software available from Pioneer—see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 62 for more on this).
2 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when
comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.
44
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
45 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
07
Low
frequencies
Level
High
frequencies
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
0
80
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time
160 (in msec)
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for
each channel. Since this difference increases as the
sound is influenced by the various room
characteristics, it is often better to capture a
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of
channel frequencies/sounds.
Left
surround
Level
Right
surround
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb
measurements made for specified frequency ranges
in each channel.1
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of
your listening area. Note that customizing system
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) on page 9 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 38 and is not necessary if you’re
satisfied with these settings.
3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ
ON or OFF, then START.
3e1.Reverb Measurement
3e1.Reverb Measurement
Now Analyzing …
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
EQ OFF
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
Speaker Level
[ START ]
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
0
80
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time
160 (in msec)
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often
not necessary to make a 30~50ms setting. Later time
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what
works best for your particular room.
Note that changing the room (for example, moving
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.
3.Manual MCACC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3 e.EQ Professional
Fine Channel Level
Fine SP Distance
Standing Wave
EQ Adjust
EQ Professional
:Return
1 . Reverb Measurement
2 . Reverb View
3 . Advanced EQ Setup
ENTER:Next
(2/5)
Measure with
:Cancel
[ OK ]
[
]
[
]
:Cancel
The following options determine how the reverb
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View and Output PC (Data Management):
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area without the equalization
performed by this receiver (before calibration).
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of
your listening area with the equalization performed
by this receiver (after calibration).2 Note that the EQ
response may not appear entirely flat due to
adjustments necessary for your listening area.
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 82
for troubleshooting information.
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN
when you’re done.
:Return
3e2.Reverb View
2
Select an option and press ENTER.
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the
reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical
output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 62 to connect an RS-232C
cable before selecting this option).
M1 : EQ OFF
Ch
L
Fq [
125Hz ]
dB
0
80
160ms
:Return
Note
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 9 or Reverb Measurement
operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations
are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves
eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the
reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves
as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function.
2 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the
System Setup menu and press MCACC to select it before pressing SETUP.
45
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
07
46 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
This appears according to the setting you chose in
Reverb Measurement (step 3 on page 45). Use / to
select the channel and the frequency you want to check.
Use / to go back and forth between the two. Note that
the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB
steps.
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, enter the
desired time setting for calibration. Press  to proceed
to the next screen, and then select START.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can
choose the time period that will be used for the final
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is
best to use the measurement results as a reference for
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we
recommend using the 30~50ms setting.
3e3.Adv. EQ Setup
Ch
L
L
(1/2)
Fq [
125Hz ]
Tm [ 30-50ms ]
dB
3e3.Adv. EQ Setup
1 Select ‘Data Management’ from the System Setup
menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 38 if you’re not already at this screen.
System Setup MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
80
2
(2/2)
Use / to select the channel, frequency, and time
setting. Use / to switch between them.
Select the setting from the following time periods (in
milliseconds): 0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms,
40~60ms, 50~70ms and 60~80ms. This setting will be
applied to all channels during calibration.
Select the setting you want to adjust.
• MCACC Data Check – Checks the settings for any of
your MCACC presets using the on-screen display
(see Checking MCACC preset data below).
• MCACC Memory Clear – Clears any MCACC presets
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on
page 47).
:Cancel
You can switch between your connected speakers
(excluding the subwoofer), and display the
measurements for the following frequencies: 63Hz,
125Hz, 250Hz, 500Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz and
16kHz.
:Return
• MCACC Memory Copy – Copies settings from one
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC
preset data on page 47).
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
EQ Type [ SYMMETRY ]
Stand Wave Multi - Point
[ YES ]
ENTER:Start
MCACC Data Check
Memory Rename
MCACC Memory Copy
MCACC Memory Clear
Output PC
• Memory Rename – Names your MCACC presets for
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets on
page 47).
160ms
:Cancel
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
:Exit
Place the mic at your
2nd reference point.
[ START ]
0
4.Data Management
Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
Manual MCACC
Data Management
Manual SP Setup
Input Setup
Other Setup
• Output PC – See Connecting a PC for Advanced
MCACC output on page 62 for more on this.
Checking MCACC preset data
After you have completed Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 9 or Automatic
MCACC (Expert) on page 38, you can check your
calibrated settings using the on-screen display.
1 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
4.Data Management
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are
given the option to check the settings on-screen.
4a.MCACC Data Check
MCACC Data Check
Memory Rename
MCACC Memory Copy
MCACC Memory Clear
Output PC
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
:Return
Speaker
Channel
Speaker
Standing
Acoustic
Setting
Level
Distance
Wave
Cal EQ
ENTER:Next
:Return
Data Management
2
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,
allowing you to calibrate your system for different
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the
same listening position).1 This is useful for alternate
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).
3 Select the MCACC preset that you want to check.
Use / if necessary to switch speakers/settings.
Select the setting you want to check.
• It is useful to do this while a source is playing so you
can compare the different settings.
4a5.EQ Data Check
MCACC
M1
Ch
[SBL]
:Return
TRM
From this menu you can check your current settings,
copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier
identification and clear any ones you don’t need.
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
16k
dB
63Hz
125Hz
250Hz
500Hz
1kHz
2kHz
4kHz
8kHz
16kHz
TRIM
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Note
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 9 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38, either of which you
should have already completed.
46
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
47 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
07
4 Press RETURN to go back to the Data Check menu,
repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
4 Select ‘Copy’ to confirm and copy the settings.
Completed! shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been copied, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re
using, you may want to rename them for easier
identification.
1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration
settings of that preset.
1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
4.Data Management
4.Data Management
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4b.Memory Rename
MCACC Data Check
Memory Rename
MCACC Memory Copy
MCACC Memory Clear
Output PC
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
[
[
[
[
[
M E M O RY
M E M O RY
M E M O RY
M E M O RY
M E M O RY
M E M O RY
:Return
1
2
3
4
5
6
]
]
]
]
]
3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,
then press RETURN when you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 41), we
recommend copying your current settings1 to an unused
MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will
give you a reference point from which to start.
1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4c.MCACC Memory Copy
MCACC Data Check
Memory Rename
MCACC Memory Copy
MCACC Memory Clear
Output PC
4d.MCACC Memory Clear
MCACC Data Check
Memory Rename
MCACC Memory Copy
MCACC Memory Clear
Output PC
Clear
M1. MEMORY 1
Start Clear
[ Cancel ]
:Return
:Cancel
:Finish
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then
select an appropriate preset name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a
preset name.
4.Data Management
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
MCACC Position Rename
C o py
All Data
F ro m
All Data
[ M1. MEMORY 1 ]
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
3 Select ‘Clear’ to confirm and clear the preset.
Completed! shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC
preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to
the Data Management setup menu.
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need
to make these settings once (unless you change the
placement of your current speaker system or add new
speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your system,
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 9, it isn’t necessary to make all of these
settings.
To
[ M2. MEMORY 2 ]
S t a r t C o py
:Return
2
[ Cancel ]
Caution
:Cancel
Select the setting you want to copy.
• All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
• LEVEL & DISTANCE – Copies only the channel level
and speaker distance settings of the selected
MCACC preset memory.
3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the
settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy
them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re
currently using (this can’t be undone).
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at
high volume.
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.
5.Manual SP Setup
System Setup MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
Manual MCACC
Data Management
Manual SP Setup
Input Setup
Other Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
X-Curve
THX Audio Setting
:Exit
:Return
Note
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 9 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38.
47
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
07
48 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
• Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see below).
• Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your
speaker system (see below).
• Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your
speakers from the listening position (page 49).
• X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker
system for movie soundtracks (page 50).
• THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are
using a THX speaker setup (page 50).
3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 9 are correct.1 Note that this setting
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set
independently.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
5.Manual SP Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
:Return
F ro n t
SMALL
Center [ SMALL
Surr
[ SMALL
SB
[ S M A L L x2
SW
[
YES
• Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a
subwoofer).
• SB – Select the number of surround back speakers
you have (one, two or none).3 Select LARGE if your
surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to
the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t
connect surround back speakers choose NO.
• SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels
set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when
YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want
the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or
you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that
would normally come out the front and center
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer).4 If you did
not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other speakers).
3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.5
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
5a.Speaker Setting
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
X-Curve
THX Audio Setting
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to
the front speakers).
]
]
]
]
X . OV E R [ 8 0 H z ]
(THX:ALL SMALL )
:Return
2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set,
then select a speaker size.
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the
following speakers:2
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the
overall balance of your speaker system, an important
factor when setting up a home theater system.
Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be set to LARGE
if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
3 • If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.
4 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not,
however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due
low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with
it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems,
the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
5 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing
back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
48
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
49 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
07
Important
Tip
• When Channel Level is selected while MCACC is set
to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory
appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.
5b.Channel Level
Speaker Distance
Select MCACC memory.
For good sound depth and separation from your system,
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from
the listening position. The receiver can then add the
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
:Cancel
ENTER:Next
1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup
menu.
5.Manual SP Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5b.Channel Level
MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
Test Tone
AUTO
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
X-Curve
THX Audio Setting
+0.5dB
:Return
ENTER:Next
• You can change the channel levels at any time by
press RECEIVER, then press CH LEVEL, and then
using / on the remote control.
Important
• When Speaker Distance is selected while MCACC is
set to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC
memory appears. Select a memory to adjust
manually.
5c.Speaker Distance
:Cancel
Select MCACC memory.
2
Select a setup option.
• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from
speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel
levels.
• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves
from speaker to speaker automatically.
MCACC OFF
M1.MEMORY 1
ENTER:Next
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
3 Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.
5.Manual SP Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5b.Channel Level
Please wait...
:Cancel
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
X-Curve
THX Audio Setting
20
:Return
CAUTION
Loud test tones will
be output.
:Cancel
4 Adjust the level of each channel using /.
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers.
The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown
on-screen:
2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using /.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01 m
increments.
5c.Speaker Distance
M C AC C
L
C
R
[
[
5c.Speaker Distance
: M 1 . M E M O RY 1
M C AC C
: M 1 . M E M O RY 1
0.50 m
1.50 m ]
1.00 m ]
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
5.05
1.50
0.50
1.50
5.05
[
[
[
[
m
m]
m]
m]
m]
5b.Channel Level
M C AC C
L
C
R
[
[
:Finish
: M 1 . M E M O RY 1
0.0 dB SR
0.0 dB ] SBR
0.0 dB ] SBL
SL
SW
[
[
[
[
[
0.0 dB ]
0.0 dB ]
0.0 dB ]
0.0 dB ]
0.0 dB ]
:Finish
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
:Finish
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is
emitted.1
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround
back speakers are the same distance from the
listening position.
Note
1 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB
SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.
49
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
50 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
The System Setup menu
07
X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie
soundtracks.1
5e.THX Audio Setting
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
ON
0 - 0.3m
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
5.Manual SP Setup
X-Curve
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
X-Curve
THX Audio Setting
:Finish
3 Specify the distance of your surround back speakers
from each other.
-2.0dB/oct
8k
4k
:Return
16k
2k
1k
500
63
5e.THX Audio Setting
250
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5d.X-Curve
125
1
2 Select either ON or OFF for THX Loudness Plus
setting.
Loudness Plus
SB SP Position
[
ON
]
:Finish
0 - 0.3m
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope
increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
room size:
Room size (m2)
X-Curve (dB/oct)
≤36
≤48
–0.5
–1
≤60
–1.5
≤72
–2
≤300
–2.5
≤1000
–3
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and
the X-Curve has no effect.
3
:Finish
• 0 – 0.3m – Surround speakers within 30 cm apart
(best for THX surround sound).
• > 0.3 – 1.2m – Surround speakers between 30 cm
and 1.2 m apart.
• 1.2m < – Surround speakers more than 1.2 m apart.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Select ‘Return’, then press ENTER to finish.
THX Audio Setting
When the THX Loudness Plus function is used, sound
can be played with the full surround effect even when the
volume is low.
For the most effective results when using the THX
SELECT2 Cinema, THX SELECT2 Music and THX
SELECT2 Games listening modes (see Using the Home
THX modes on page 30) with the Advanced Speaker Array
(ASA) system (see About THX on page 88), it is required
that you make the setting. See Placing the speakers on
page 21 for more on THX speaker placement.2
1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
5.Manual SP Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
X-Curve
THX Audio Setting
:Return
Note
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 30).
2 If you don’t have surround back speakers, or have only one surround back speaker or select Speaker B, Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 for Surround Back
System, you won’t be able to select this setting (Cannot select shows in the display).
50
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
51 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
08
Chapter 8:
Other connections
Connecting your iPod to the receiver
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off
the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the
last connection you make with your system.
• Do not allow any contact between speaker wires from
different terminals.
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.1
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
iPod DIRECT USB terminal.
VIDEO
ON
L AUDIO R
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
iPod DIRECT
USB
CD
CD-R
FM/AM
HDMI
iPod USB
VIDEO
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
3 Press TOP MENU to display iPod Top menu.
When the display shows Top Menu you’re ready to play
music from the iPod.3
MULTI CH IN
MASTER
VOLUME
VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO R
2 Switch the receiver on and press the iPod USB
input source button on the remote control to switch
the receiver to the iPod USB.
The front panel display shows Loading while the receiver
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.
• If after pressing iPod USB the display shows No
Device, try switching off the receiver and
reconnecting the iPod to the receiver.
MCACC
PORTABLE
PUSH
OPEN
2
1 Set this receiver to the standby mode, and then use
the USB cable (for iPod connection)2 to connect your
iPod to the iPod DIRECT USB terminal on the front
panel of this receiver.
For the cable connection, refer to also the operating
instructions for iPod.
iPod playback
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage
of the OSD of your TV connected to this receiver.4 You can
also control all operations for music in the front panel
display of this receiver.
MCACC
SETUP MIC
VSX-LX51
USB cable
(for iPod connection)
iPod
Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist,
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to
using your iPod directly.
MENU
iPod Top
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
Enter
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Note
1 • This system is compatible with the audio of iPod nano, iPod fifth generation, iPod classic, iPod touch (not supported iPod shuffle and iPhone). However,
that some of the functions may be restricted for some models. Note, however, compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod. Please
be sure to use the latest available software version.
• iPod is licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material
resulting from the iPod failure.
2 The USB cable (for iPod connection) is not included with this receiver.
3 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.
4 • Note that non-roman characters in the title are displayed as #.
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod.
51
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
52 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
08
1 Use / to select a category, then press ENTER to
browse that category.
• To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
2 Use / to browse the selected category (e.g.,
albums).
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you
want to play, then press  to start playback.1
Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like
this:
Playlists  Songs
Artists  Albums  Songs
Albums  Songs
Songs
Podcasts
Genres  Artists  Albums  Songs
Composers  Albums  Songs
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
Tip
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category
by selecting the All item at the top of each category
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a
particular artist.
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback controls for
your iPod. Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
to the iPod USB operation mode.
Button
What it does

Press to start playback.
If you start playback when something other than a
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that
category will play.

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
/
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.
/
Press to skip to previous/next track.
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One,
Repeat All and Repeat Off.
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle Songs,
Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.
DISPLAY
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
/
When browsing, press to move to previous/next
levels. During playback, press to skip to previous/
next track.
Button
What it does
/
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the
playback speed: Faster  Normal  Slower
TOP
MENU
Press to return to the iPod Top menu screen.
RETURN
Press to return to the previous level.
Important
If an error message lights in the display, try following the
points below:
Symptom
What it means
Error I1
There is a problem with the signal path from the
iPod to the receiver. Switch off the receiver and
reconnect the iPod to the receiver. If this doesn’t
seem to work, try resetting your iPod.
Error I2
The software version being used with the iPod
needs to be updated. Update the software being
used with the iPod (please use the latest iPod
software versions later than the iPod updater
2004-10-20).
Error I3
The iPod that is not supported is connected.
Check whether the iPod was supported by this
receiver (page 51).
When the iPod software version is too old. Update
the iPod software to the latest version.
Error I4
When there is no response from the iPod. Update
the iPod software to the latest version. If this
doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.
No Music
Track
There are no playable songs currently stored in the
iPod. Input some music files compatible with iPod
playback.
No Track
When there are no tracks in the category selected
on the iPod. Select a different category.
Switching the iPod controls2
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod
and the receiver.
1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.3
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this
receiver’s remote control and OSD become inactive.
2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver
controls.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Note
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.
2 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.
3 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver.
52
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
53 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
08
Basic playback controls
Connecting a USB device
1
It is possible to listen to two-channel audio using the
USB interface on the front of this receiver. Connect a
USB mass storage device2 as shown below.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the
iPod DIRECT USB terminal.
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
L
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO R
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
The following table shows the basic controls on the
remote for USB playback. Press iPod USB to switch the
remote control to the iPod USB operation mode.
Button
What it does

Starts normal playback.

Pauses/unpauses playback.
/
Press to skip to previous/next track.
MCACC
SETUP MIC
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat
Folder, Repeat One and Repeat All.
+
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle On
and Shuffle Off.
USB mass
storage device
Connecting your USB device to the receiver
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the
receiver to the iPod USB.
No Device appears in the OSD.
3 Connect your USB device.3
The USB terminal is located on the front panel.
Loading appears in the OSD as this receiver starts
recognizing the USB device connected. After the
recognition, a playback screen appears in the OSD and
playback starts automatically.4
Folder/File number
USB
FLD004TRK001
MP3
Repeat or Shuffle
Song name
Artist name
R e l a x Yo u r B o d y
Kevin Jackson
We a r e a l l o n e
Play
File format
Album name
0:01
Elapsed time
DISPLAY
Press repeatedly to change the song playback
information displayed in the front panel display.
/
During playback, press to skip to previous/next
track.
TOP MENU Press to skip to first track.
Important
If a USB ERROR message lights in the display, try
following the points below:
USB ERROR
What it means
USB ERROR1
The power requirements of the USB device
are too high for this receiver.
USB ERROR2
The USB device is incompatible.
USB ERROR3
See Troubleshooting on page 78 for more on
this error message.
DECODE
There is some problem with the audio data or
the file’s additional information.
ERROR5
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched
off.
• Select another input source (like DVD), then switch
back to iPod USB.
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB
device is incompatible.
Note
1 This includes playback of WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC files (except files with copy-protection or restricted playback).
2 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players (MP3 players)
of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this receiver to a personal computer for USB playback.
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of
data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
• With large amounts of data, it may take longer for the receiver to read the contents of a USB device.
3 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
4 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the OSD instead; when neither the album name nor
the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
• It is not possible to output the USB audio to ZONE 2.
5 • If this error occurs, playback is interrupted and the next playable file is played automatically.
• This error may occur if the title information is changed on a computer, etc.
53
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
08
54 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
Compressed audio compatibility
About MPEG-4 AAC
Note that although most standard bit/sampling rate
combinations for compressed audio are compatible,
some irregularly encoded files may not play back. The list
below shows compatible formats for compressed audio
files:
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the
MPEG-4 AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2
AAC, forming the basis of the MPEG-4 audio
compression technology. The file format and extension
used depend on the application used to encode the AAC
file. This receiver plays back AAC files encoded by
iTunes® bearing the extension ‘.m4a’. DRM-protected
files will not play, and files encoded with some versions
of iTunes® may not play.
• MP3 (MPEG-1/2/2.5 Audio Layer 3) – Sampling rates:
8 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (128
kbps or higher recommended); File extension: .mp3
• WMA (Windows Media Audio) – Sampling rates: 32
kHz / 44.1 kHz; Bit rates: 32 kbps to 192 kbps (128
kbps or higher recommended); File extension: .wma;
WMA9 Pro and WMA lossless encoding: No
• AAC (MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding) – Sampling
rates: 11.025 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 16 kbps to 320
kbps (128 kbps or higher recommended); File
extension: .m4a; Apple lossless encoding: No
Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
About WMA
Other compatibility information
• VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC
playback: Yes1
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) protection
compatible: Yes (DRM-protected audio files will not
play in this receiver).
The Windows Media® logo printed on the box indicates
that this receiver can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. This receiver plays back WMA
files encoded using Windows Media® Player bearing the
extension ‘.wma’. Note that DRM-protected files will not
play, and files encoded with some versions of Windows
Media® Player may not play.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Note
1 Note that in some cases playback time will not be displayed correctly.
54
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
55 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
08
Connecting the multichannel analog
inputs
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending
on whether your player supports surround back
channels).1 Make sure that the player is set to output
multichannel analog audio.
1 Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer
outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding
MULTI CH IN jack on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
connections.
2 If your DVD player also has outputs for surround
back channels, connect these to the corresponding
MULTI CH IN jacks on this receiver.
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the
connections.
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK L (Single) jack on this
receiver.
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround
speakers for the surround channel, not the surround
back channel.
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs
for surround sound playback.2
M/AM
iPod USB
MULTI CH IN
VSX-LX51
DIGITAL IN
PHASE
CONTROL
DVD
ADVANCED
MCACC
BD
TV
SAT
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DVR 1/DVR 2
VIDEO
HDMI 1/HDMI 2
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
CD
CD-R
FM/AM
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
HDMI
iPod USB
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO
S
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
L
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO R
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
Speaker B setup
Caution
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off
the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the
last connection you make with your system.
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker
wires from different terminals.
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance
between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see Switching the
speaker impedance on page 72 if you plan to use
speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).
After selecting Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 41, you can use the speakers connected
to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear
panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See
Switching the speaker system below for the listening
options with this setup.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back
speaker terminals on the rear panel.
Connect them the same way you connected your
speakers in Installing your speaker system on page 20.
Make sure to review Placing the speakers on page 21
when placing the speakers in another room.
2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surround Back System
menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 41 to do this.
MULTI CH IN
MASTER
VOLUME
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
2 Press MULTI CH IN on the front panel to turn the
multi-channel input on.
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in
Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input
Setup on page 67.
MCACC
SETUP MIC
+
1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the
proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to
output multichannel analog audio.
Switching the speaker system
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker
setting on page 41, three speaker system settings are
possible using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected
Normal or Front Bi-Amp, the button will simply switch
your main speaker system on or off. The options below
are for the Speaker B setting only.3
Note
1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to select MULTI CH IN (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs below for more on this).
2 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
3 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 47. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound is heard
from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 41 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
55
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
08
56 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
• Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to
select a speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal, the
button will simply switch your main speaker system (A)
on or off.
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
L
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO R
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly
inserted.
2 Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the
Surround Back System menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 41 to specify
how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.
MCACC
SETUP MIC
+
Caution
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:
• SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.
• SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.
• SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).
• SP (off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as
when selecting speaker system A (above).
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals
have two metal plates that connect the High to the
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for
more information.
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing
so may damage your speakers.
Bi-wiring your speakers
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as biamping, but additionally, interference effects within the
wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to
do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they
must have separate terminals for the high and low
frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected
Normal or Speaker B in Surround back speaker setting on
page 41.
• To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to
the speaker terminal on the receiver.
Bi-amping your front speakers
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifier (in this case, to both front and surround back
terminals) for better crossover performance. Your
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
1 Connect your speakers as shown below.
This illustration below shows the connections for biamping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right
speaker in the same way.
Front left
speaker
SPEAKERS
R
A
FRONT
CENTER
L
SURROUND
R
L
R
SURROUND BACK / B
L
(Single)
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
High
Low
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals
output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front
or surround back) is powering which part (High or Low)
of the speaker.
56
En
Caution
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are
fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your
speakers.
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same
terminal in this way.
VSX-LX51_HY.book
57 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
08
Connecting additional amplifiers
MULTI-ZONE listening
This receiver has more than enough power for any home
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power
your speakers.
This receiver can power up to two independent systems
in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTIZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is
shown below.
• Before making or changing the connections, switch
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
AC outlet.
Sub zone
Main zone
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 1
IN 2
M
IN 3
ANALOG
INPUT
L
IN 3
MONITOR
OUT
R
ANTENNA
DVR2
Front channel
amplifier
Y
OUT
ZONE 2
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
ANALOG
PB FM UNBAL 75
PR
IN
FRONT
INPUT
AM LOOP
Center channel
amplifier (mono)
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
CENTER
(Single) PRE OUT
CD
SPEAKERS
R
A
ANALOG
CD-R
CENTER
L
SURROU
R
D BACK
INPUT
L
FRONT
R
Surround channel
amplifier
D-R
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK / B
AUDIO IN
ANALOG
INPUT
L
(Single)
L
R
Surround back
channel amplifier
ANALOG
INPUT
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
Powered
subwoofer
VSX-LX51
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))
terminal only.
• The sound from the surround back terminals will
depend on how you have configured the Surround
back speaker setting on page 41.
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.
VSX-LX51
Different sources can be playing in two zones at the same
time or, depending on your needs, the same source can
also be used. The main and sub zones have independent
power (the main zone power can be off while the sub zone
is on) and the sub zone can be controlled by the remote
or front panel controls. However, you may need to specify
the volume settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 67.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have a
separate TV and speakers for your sub zone (ZONE 2).1
You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not
using the Surround Back System setup (page 58) for your
sub zone.
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front
speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 48) to
LARGE.
Note
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the bass/treble controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone.
You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.
57
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
08
58 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows what you can listen to in the
sub zone:
Sub Zone
Input sources available
ZONE2
iPod, the built-in tuner and other analog
audio sources.a With video sources, only
composite video is possible.
• Connect a TV monitor to the ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT
jacks on the rear of this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Sub zone
Main zone
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
VSX-LX51
MONITOR
OUT
IN 3
ANTENNA
Y
a.• With the MULTI CH IN input, sound is output only from the front L/R
channels.
• The USB audio cannot be output to ZONE 2.
PB FM UNBAL 75
PR
ZONE 2
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
FRONT
AM LOOP
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
CENTER
(Single) PRE OUT
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
CD
• Connect a separate amplifier to the ZONE 2 AUDIO
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT
jacks, both on the rear of this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
Sub zone
CD-R
CENTER
SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
L
R
L
R
SURROUND BACK / B
L
(Single)
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI
Main zone
OUT
IN
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 1
IN 2
M
IN 3
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
DVR2
OUT
ZONE 2
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust
the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTIZONE remote controls on page 59.
VSX-LX51
CD
CD-R
STANDBY/ON
SPEAKERS
R
A
FRONT
CENTER
L
SURROU
R
PHASE
CONTROL
ADVANCED
MCACC
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
HDMI
D BACK
DVD
BD
TV
SAT
DVR 1/DVR 2
VIDEO
HDMI 1/HDMI 2
CD
CD-R
FM/AM
iPod USB
MULTI CH IN
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO
PHONES
AUDIO IN
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
L
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO R
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
+
VSX-LX51
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
Surround Back System MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE
2)
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting
on page 41 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling
the main zone (for example, changing the input source or
starting playback).
PHONES
HOME
THX
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
STANDARD
SURROUND
SPEAKERS
ADVANCED
SURROUND
ST
–
STEREO/
A.L.C.
ST
+
1 Press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF button on the front
panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
• ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE feature on
• ZONE 2 OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE
control has been switched ON.
58
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
59 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
2
Press CONTROL.
• When the receiver is on,1 make sure that any
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE 2
shows in the display. If this is not showing, the front
panel controls affect the main zone only.
3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source
for the zone you have selected.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected
to the CD-R inputs to the sub room (ZONE 2).
• If you select FM/AM, you can use the tuner controls
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets
on page 35 if you’re unsure how to do this).2
08
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of
this receiver.5
1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR ZONE2 IN
jack on the rear of this receiver.
Closet or shelving unit
• You can’t use the iPod USB functions simultaneously
with using the MULTI-ZONE feature.
Non-Pioneer
component
IR
IN
4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the
volume.
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE
volume control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 67.3
Pioneer
component
CONTROL
IN
5 When you’re finished, press CONTROL again to
return to the main zone controls.
You can also press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF button on
the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone.4
OUT
HDMI
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
(CD)
DVD
OPTICAL
IN 1
IN 1
(TV SAT)
IN 2
(DVR1)
AUDIO
IN
CON- IN
TROL
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
What it does
Switches on/off power in the sub zone.
INPUT
SELECT
Use to select the input source in the sub zone.
Input
source
buttons
Use to select the input source directly (this may
not work for some functions) in the sub zone.
MASTER
VOLUME
+/–
Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.
IN
AUDIO
IN
OUT
(DVR2)
OUT
1
AT)
R
2
R1)
L
OUT
FRONT
R
MULTI CH IN
IR
ZONE2
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
IN
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
DVR1
CON- IN
O
IN
TROL
OUT
IR
IN 3
DIGITAL

DVD
TV SAT
CAL
L
IN
Button
O
IN
IN 2
BD IN
ZONE2
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE
remote controls:
OUT
2
VIDEO
D)
IN 1
(DVD)
RS-232C
IN 2
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 to
operate the corresponding zone.
IN
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
OUT
L
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
3
R)
OUT
R
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
UT
1
SIGNABLE
L
12V TRIGGER
IR receiver
2 Connect the IR ZONE2 IN jack of another
component to the IR ZONE2 OUT jack on the rear of
this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for
the type of cable necessary for the connection.
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components
with this receiver’s sensor on page 77 to connect to
the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR ZONE2 OUT
jack.
Note
1 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE 2 continues to show in the display.
2 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone.
Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
3 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.
4 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.
5 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.
59
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
08
60 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
Switching components on and off using
the 12 volt trigger
Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat
screen TV
You can connect components in your system (such as a
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input
function. However, you must specify which input
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup
menu on page 65. Note that this will only work with
components that have a standby mode.
If you have a Pioneer flat screen TV, you can use an SR+
cable1 to connect it to this receiver and take advantage of
various convenient features, such as automatic video
input switching of the flat screen TV when the input is
changed.2
12V
TRIGGER
Pioneer flat screen TV
CONTROL
OUT
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
IR
ZONE2
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN 3
(DVR2)
VSX-LX51
HDMI
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
OUT
FRONT
OUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
DIGITAL
L
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
RS-232C
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
IN
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
OUT
IN 2
(CD)
DVD
BD IN
R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
IN 1
IN 1
AUDIO
IN
CON- IN
TROL
TV SAT
IN
DVR2
DVR1
OUT
IN
L
OUT
(TV SAT)
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
IR
ZONE2
VSX-LX51
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN 3
(DVR2)
SPEAKERS
R
A
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
• Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to
the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA
(50 mA total for terminals 1 and 2).
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on
The Input Setup menu on page 65.
DIGITAL
L
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
R
SUBWOOFER
Important
• You can’t use the SR+ features when HDMI Control
is set to ON. Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF
when you use the SR+ features (page 63).
• If you connect to a Pioneer flat screen TV using an
SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control
at the flat screen TV remote sensor to control the
receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the
receiver using the remote control if you switch the flat
screen TV off.
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need
to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input
Setup menu on page 65 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat
screen TVs on page 68 for detailed instructions.
Note
1 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for
more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection).
2 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer flat screen TVs from 2003 onward.
60
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
61 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
08
• Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the
CONTROL IN jack of this receiver with the CONTROL
OUT jack of your flat screen TV.
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat
screen TV
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of
features become available to make using this receiver
with your Pioneer flat screen TV even easier. These
features include:
VIDEO
INPUT 1
Pioneer flat screen TV
VIDEO
INPUT 2
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings,
such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.
• On-screen volume display.
• On-screen display of listening mode.
DVD player
Satellite receiver, etc.
DVD
AUDIO IN
TV SAT
AUDIO IN
VSX-LX51
• Automatic video input switching on the flat screen
TV.
• Automatic volume muting on the flat screen TV.
See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat screen TVs on page 68
for more on setting up the receiver.
STANDBY/ON
PHASE
CONTROL
DVD
ADVANCED
MCACC
BD
TV
SAT
DIGITAL PRECISION
PROCESSING
DVR 1/DVR 2
VIDEO
HDMI 1/HDMI 2
DIGITAL VIDEO
SCALER
CD
CD-R
FM/AM
HDMI
iPod USB
MULTI CH IN
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
AUTO SURR/
STREAM DIRECT
HOME
THX
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STEREO/
A.L.C.
VIDEO
PHONES
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON/OFF
SPEAKERS
ST
–
ST
L
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO R
DIGITAL IN
iPod DIRECT
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
Important
+
VSX-LX51
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should
connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a
slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For
each component, connect the video output directly to the
flat screen TV, and just connect the audio (analog and/or
digital) to this receiver.
• The SR+ features do not work when the iPod USB
function is selected.
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
9
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
MAIN
ZONE 2
1 Make sure that the flat screen TV and this receiver
are switched on and that they are connected with the
SR+ cable.
See Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV on
page 60 for more on connecting these components.
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to
which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input
Setup menu on page 65.
2 To switch SR+ mode on/off, press RECEIVER, then
press the SR+ button.
The front panel display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.
• The automatic video input switching and the
automatic volume muting features are enabled
separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat screen TVs
on page 68.
61
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
08
62 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other connections
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC
output
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the
RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack
on this receiver. See the documentation provided with
the Advanced MCACC application for more information.
When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
(see page 43) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of
your listening room, you can graphically check the
results on your computer connected to this receiver.
RS-232C
Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect
the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C
jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be
cross type, female–female).
The software to output the results is available from the
support area of the Pioneer website
(http://www.pioneer.eu). Instructions for using the
software are also available here. If you have any
questions about the software, please contact the Pioneer
Service Center specified on your warranty card.
Please make sure your system meets the following
requirements:
• Operating system must be Microsoft Windows® XP
(Service Pack 2) or Windows® 2000.
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD
K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of
memory, and your monitor must be able to display a
minimum resolution of 800x600.
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for graphical
output. Refer to the operating instructions and/or the
PC manufacturer for more information on making
the proper port settings.
• System must have internet access.
• Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the
rear panel of the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver and all connected
components are switched off and disconnected from the
power outlet when you do this.1
Personal computer
Advanced MCACC output using your PC
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 1
in Data Management on page 46. Note that transmission
data is erased when the receiver is turned off.
1 Select ‘Output PC’ and press ENTER.
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the
MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD.
4.Data Management
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4e.Output PC
MCACC Data Check
Memory Rename
MCACC Memory Copy
MCACC Memory Clear
Output PC
:Return
S t a r t t h e M C AC C
a p p l i c a t i o n o n yo u r P C
:Cancel
2 Start the MCACC application on your computer.
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on
your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the
receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off
the receiver, you might want to save the information on
your PC after measurement.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Data Management menu. Continue
with other settings in the Data Management menu if
necessary. Press RETURN again to exit the Data
Management menu.
Note
1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement option in Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 45 (measurement
data is cleared if you switch off the power).
62
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
63 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
HDMI Control
09
Chapter 9:
HDMI Control
Important
• The KURO LINK function name used on the web and
in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control in the
operating instructions and on the product.
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend
that you connect your HDMI component not to a flat
screen TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on
this receiver.
HDMI-compatible monitor or
flat screen TV
By connecting this receiver to an HDMI Controlcompatible Pioneer flat screen TV or the HDD/DVD
recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this
receiver from the remote control of a connected flat
screen TV, as well as have the connected flat screen TV
automatically change inputs in response to operations
carried out on this receiver.
Refer to the operating manual for your flat screen TV for
more information about which operations can be carried
out by connecting via HDMI cable.
AV OUT
DIGITAL OUT
R
AUDIO
L
HDMI IN
• You cannot use this function with components that
do not support HDMI Control.
• We cannot guarantee this receiver will work with
HDMI Control-compatible components other than
those made by Pioneer.
HDMI
SVIDEO IN
COAXIAL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
OUT
VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
RS-232C
IN 2
(CD)
DVD
BD IN
OPTICAL
Making the HDMI Control connections
IN 1
AUDIO
IN
CON- IN
TROL
IN 1
(TV SAT)
TV SAT
IN
DVR1
OUT
DVR
L
OUT
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
IR
ZONE2
You can use synchronized operation for a connected flat
screen TV and up to three other components.
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN 3
(DVR2)
SPEA
A
OUT
FRONT
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK
OUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
Be sure to connect the flat screen TV’s audio cable to the
audio input of this receiver.
DIGITAL
L
12V TRIGGER
2
(OUTPUT
12 V
TOTAL
50 mA MAX)
R
SUBWOOFER
VSX-LX51
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cords to the wall socket.
• After connecting this receiver to an AC outlet, a 15
second initialization process begins. You cannot
carry out any operations during initialization. The
HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during
initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once
it has stopped blinking.
HDMI-equipped component
HDMI OUT
Setting the HDMI options
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as
HDMI Control-compatible connected components in
order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For
more information see the operating instructions for each
component.
Setting the HDMI Control mode
Choose whether to set this receiver’s HDMI Control
function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use
the HDMI Control function.
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put
this setting to OFF.
63
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
64 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
HDMI Control
09
1
Press RECEIVER, then press the SETUP button.
Synchronized amp mode operations
2
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
By connecting a component to this receiver with an
HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which
allows you to synchronize the following operations2:
3 Select ‘HDMI Control Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
7.Other Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
7d.HDMI Control Setup
Multi Channel In Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
SR+ Setup
HDMI Control Setup
OSD Adjustment
HDMI Control
:Return
4
OFF
:Finish
Select the ‘HDMI Control’ setting you want.
• ON – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this
receiver’s power is turned off and you have a
supported source begin playback while using the
HDMI Control function, the audio and video output
from the HDMI connection are output from the flat
screen TV.1
• OFF – The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized
operations cannot be used. When this receiver’s
power is turned off, audio and video of sources
connected via HDMI are not output.
5 When you’re finished, press SETUP.
You will finish to System Setup menu.
• Displays on the flat screen TV when you mute or
adjust the volume of this receiver.
• The input of this receiver is automatically changed
when playback occurs on a connected component.
• Even if you change this receiver’s input to a device
that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized
amp mode remains in effect.
• This receiver’s input switches automatically when the
channel is switched on an HDMI control-compatible
flat screen TV.
• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from
a HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening
mode is automatically selected (see Using the genre
synchronizing function on page 34 for more on this).
Canceling synchronized amp mode
Operate the flat screen TV to cancel the synchronized
amp mode.
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected
via HDMI to a flat screen TV or while you are watching a
TV programme, the power for this receiver is turned off.
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you
must:
1
Put all components into standby mode.
2 Turn the power on for all components, with the
power for the flat screen TV being turned on last.
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this receiver, and see if video output from
connected components displays properly on the screen
or not.
About HDMI Control
• Connect the flat screen TV directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
• Only connect components you intend to use as a
source to the HDMI input of this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause
operational errors.
4 Check whether the components connected to all
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
Synchronized amp mode
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an
operation for the flat screen TV. For more information,
see the operating manual of your flat screen TV.
Note
1 • When HDMI Control is set to ON, the audio/video signals input at the HDMI IN terminals are output at the HDMI OUT terminal even when this receiver
is switched off.
• With HDMI Control set to ON, Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to OFF.
2 The linked mode remains in effect even when this receiver’s input is switched to something other than HDMI.
64
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
65 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other Settings
10
Chapter 10:
Other Settings
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to
the default settings (see Input function default and
possible settings on page 66). In this case, you need to
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which
terminal so the buttons on the remote correspond to the
components you’ve connected.
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
TUNE
EXIT
RECEIVER
TOOLS
SOURCE
TOP MENU
AUDIO
MENU
T.EDIT
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
DVD
DVR 1
BD
DVR 2
TV
CD
FM/AM
ENTER
HDMI
ST
CD-R
PTY
SEARCH
RECEIVER
ST
RETURN
MAIN
SETUP TUNE
iPod USB
CH
ZONE 2
iPod CTRL
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.
2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
SETUP.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
3
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
System Setup MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.Input Setup
Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
Manual MCACC
Data Management
Manual SP Setup
Input Setup
Other Setup
(1/2)
Input
DV D
Digital In
[ C OA X - 1
HDMI Input
[ Input-1
Component In [ Comp-3
(
]
]
]
NEXT )
:Exit
:Finish
4 Select the input function that you want to set up.
The default names correspond with the names next to the
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO)
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote
control.
6.Input Setup
(1/2)
Input
DV D
Digital In
[ C OA X - 1
HDMI Input
[ Input-1
Component In [ Comp-3
(
6.Input Setup
5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your
component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical
output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s
Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical
input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to 3)
corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the
back of the receiver.
• If you change the setting to an input that has been
previously assigned to another function (for example,
TV SAT), the setting for that function will
automatically be switched off.
• If your component is connected via a component
video cable to an input terminal other than the
default, you must tell the receiver which input
terminal your component is connected to, or else you
may see the S-Video or composite video signals
instead of the component video signals.1
6 When you’re finished, select ‘Next’ to continue to
the next screen.
The second screen of the Input Setup has three optional
settings:
• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input
function for easier identification. Select Rename to
do so, or Default to return to the system default.
• 12V Trigger 1 / 2 – After connecting a component to
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 60), select
MAIN, ZONE 2 or OFF for the corresponding trigger
setting to switch it on automatically along with the
(main or sub) zone specified.
• PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this
receiver from a flat screen TV, select the display input
to which you’ve connected the receiver.2
7 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
(1/2)
(
]
]
]
Back )
DVD
Input Name
Rename
1 2 V Tr i gg e r 1 [
OFF
]
1 2 V Tr i gg e r 2 [
OFF
]
PDP In (SR+) [
OFF
]
NEXT )
:Finish
ENTER:Next
:Finish
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 70),
you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
2 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite from the
setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV on page 60). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the flat
screen TV’s remote sensor after making this connection.
65
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
10
66 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other Settings
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally
correspond to the name of one of the input source
functions. If you have connected components to this
receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults
below, see The Input Setup menu on page 65 to tell the
receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots () indicate
possible assignments.
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make
customized settings to reflect how you are using the
receiver.
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
TUNE
EXIT
RECEIVER
TOOLS
SOURCE
TOP MENU
MENU
T.EDIT
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
Input source
DVD
DVD
Input Terminals
Digital
COAX 1
HDMI
a
Component
DVR 1

FM/AM
(BD)
BD
OPT 1
a

DVR1
OPT 2
a


DVR2
OPT 3
a

VIDEO
(Fixed)
a
TV SAT
BD
DVR 2
TV
CD
HDMI
ST
CD-R
PTY
SEARCH
iPod USB
ENTER
CH
RECEIVER
ST
RETURN
MAIN
SETUP TUNE
ZONE 2
iPod CTRL
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.
HDMI 1
(HDMI-1)
2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press
the SETUP button.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and
exit the current menu.
HDMI 2
(HDMI-2)
3
Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER.
iPod USB
System Setup MENU
CD
CD-R
COAX 2

FM/AM
a. With HDMI Control set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see HDMI
Control on page 63).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
7.Other Setup
Auto MCACC
Surround Back System
Manual MCACC
Data Management
Manual SP Setup
Input Setup
Other Setup
:Exit
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Multi Ch In Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
SR+ Setup
HDMI Control Setup
OSD Adjustment
:Return
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to
adjust these settings in order:
• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings
for a multi-channel input.
• ZONE Audio Setup – Specifies your volume setting
for a MULTI-ZONE setup (see ZONE Audio Setup on
page 67).
• SR+ Setup – Specifies how you want to control your
Pioneer flat screen TV (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat
screen TVs on page 68).
• HDMI Control Setup – Synchronizes this receiver
with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI
Control (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on
page 63).
• OSD Adjustment – Adjusts the position of the onscreen display on your TV (see OSD Adjustment on
page 68).
5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.
66
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
67 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other Settings
10
Multi Channel Input Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multichannel input.
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTIZONE listening on page 57) you may need to specify your
volume setting.
1 Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
1 Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup
menu.
7.Other Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
7.Other Setup
Multi Ch In Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
SR+ Setup
HDMI Control Setup
OSD Adjustment
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
7b.ZONE Audio Setup
Multi Ch In Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
SR+ Setup
HDMI Control Setup
OSD Adjustment
:Return
2
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.
• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
originally recorded on the source.
• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level
increased by 10 dB.
7a.Multi Ch In Setup
SW Input Gain
Video Input
0dB
[
BD ]
:Finish
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
:Return
2
ZONE 2 Volume Level
Variable
Be careful of loud
vo l u m e w h e n " F i xe d "
is selected.
:Finish
Select the volume level setting.1
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that
receiver’s volume controls. (This setting is not
available if the surround back system setting is set to
ZONE 2.)
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is
quite low in the sub zone at first, and then experiment to
find the correct level.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Note
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 41, you won’t be able to change the volume level.
67
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
68 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Other Settings
10
SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat screen TVs
OSD Adjustment
Make the following settings if you have connected a
Pioneer flat screen TV to this receiver using an SR+
cable. Note that the number of function settings available
will depend on the flat screen TV you’ve connected.
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems
difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.
See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV
on page 60 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat
screen TV on page 61.
1
Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
1 Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Other Setup
menu.
7.Other Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A
Multi Ch In Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
SR+ Setup
HDMI Control Setup
OSD Adjustment
A
X=
0 , Y=
0
[ Finish ]
:Finish
7.Other Setup
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
7c.SR+ Setup
Multi Ch In Setup
ZONE Audio Setup
SR+ Setup
HDMI Control Setup
OSD Adjustment
PDP Volume Control
OFF
Monitor Out Connect
[
OFF
:Return
2
:Return
]
:Finish
Select the ‘PDP Volume Control’ setting you want.
• OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the
flat screen TV.
• ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the
inputs that use the flat screen TV (DVD, for example),
the volume on the flat screen TV is muted so only
sound from the receiver is heard.
3 Assign any input source connected to the flat
screen TV to the corresponding input number.
This matches the receiver’s input source with a
numbered video input on the flat screen TV. For example,
assign DVD to input-2 if you have connected the your
DVD video output to video input 2 on the flat screen TV.
• The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input
that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your flat
screen TV.
7c.SR+ Setup
PDP Volume Control
[
OFF
]
Monitor Out Connect
OFF
:Finish
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
68
En
A
A
2 Use /// to move the display field around
until you get one that you feel best suits your TV.
3 When you’re finished, press ENTER.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
11_Using_other_functions.fm
69 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時51分
Using other functions
11
Chapter 11:
Using other functions
Setting
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound settings you can
make using the Audio Parameter menu. The defaults, if
not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Audio
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
1
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective
surround sound of movies at low
volumes.
Adjusts the amount of bass.
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
TREBLE
Adjusts the amount of treble.
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
S.RTRV
(Sound
Retriever)
When audio data is removed
during the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4
AAC compression process, sound
quality often suffers from an
uneven sound image. The Sound
Retriever feature employs new
DSP technology that helps bring
CD quality sound back to
compressed 2-channel audio by
restoring sound pressure and
smoothing jagged artifacts left
over after compression.
OFF
DNR
(Digital
Noise
Reduction)
May improve the quality of sound
in a noisy source (for example,
cassette or video tape with lots of
background noise) when
switched on.
OFF
DIALOG E Localizes dialog in the center
(Dialog
channel to make it stand out from
Enhancement) other background sounds in a TV
or movie soundtrack.
OFF
HIBIT
(High Bit)
Creates a wider dynamic range
with digital sources like CDs or
DVDs (Smoother, more delicate
musical expression can be
achieved by requantizing 16 bit
PCM or 20 bit compressed audio
signals to 24 bits).
OFF
DUAL
(Dual
Mono)
Specifies how dual mono
encoded Dolby Digital
soundtracks should be played.
Dual mono is not widely used, but
is sometimes necessary when
two languages need to be sent to
separate channels.
CH1 –
Channel 1 is
heard only
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
Setting
What it does
MCACC
(MCACC
preset)
Selects your favorite MCACC
M1. MEMORY 1
preset memory when multiple
to
preset memories are saved. When M6. MEMORY 6
a MCACC preset memory has
Default:
been renamed, the name given is M1. MEMORY 1
displayed.
MCACC OFFa
EQb
(Acoustic
Calibration
EQ)
Switches on/off the effects of EQ
Pro. only for the MCACC preset
memory selected. This setting is
available for each MCACC preset
memory.
S-WAVEb
(Standing
Wave)
Switches on/off the effects of
Standing Wave Control only for
the MCACC preset memory
selected. This setting is available
for each MCACC preset memory.
DELAY
(Sound
Delay)
Option(s)
ON
OFFc
ON
OFF
Some monitors have a slight
0.0 to 6.0
delay when showing video, so the
(frames)
soundtrack will be slightly out of 1 second = 25
sync with the picture. By adding a frames (PAL)
bit of delay, you can adjust the
Default: 0.0
sound to match the presentation
of the video.
MID/LDN OFF
BASS
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.
4
Option(s)
MIDNIGHT ON
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble
LOUDNESS
ON
from music sources at low
volumes.
Press RECEIVER, then press AUDIO PARAMETER.
2 Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
What it does
ON
ON
ON
ON
CH2 –
Channel 2 is
heard only
CH1 CH2 –
Both channels
heard from
front speakers
69
En
11_Using_other_functions.fm
11
70 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後5時22分
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
DRC
(Dynamic
Range
Control)
Adjusts the level of dynamic
range for movie soundtracks
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master
Audio (you may need to use this
feature when listening to
surround sound at low volumes).
LFE ATT
(LFE
Attenuate)
Option(s)
Setting
d
AUTO
OFF
MAX
MID
0dB
Some Dolby Digital and DTS
audio sources include ultra-low
–5dB/ –10dB/
bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator
–15dB/ –20dB/
as necessary to prevent the ultraOFF
low bass tones from distorting the
sound from the speakers.
The LFE is not limited when set to
0 dB, which is the recommended
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is
limited by the respective degree.
When OFF is selected, no sound
is output from the LFE channel.
SACD
GAINe
Brings out detail in SACDs by
maximizing the dynamic range
(during digital processing).
HDMIf
(HDMI
Audio)
Specifies the routing of the HDMI
audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV or flat
screen TV. When THROUGH is
selected, no sound is output from
this receiver.
A. DELAY
(Auto
delay)
This feature automatically
corrects the audio-to-video delay
between components connected
with an HDMI cable. The audio
delay time is set depending on the
operational status of the display
connected with an HDMI cable.
The video delay time is
automatically adjusted according
to the audio delay time.g
OFF
C. WIDTHh
(Center
Width)
(Applicable
only when
using a
center
speaker)
Provides a better blend of the
front speakers by spreading the
center channel between the front
right and left speakers, making it
sound wider (higher settings) or
narrower (lower settings).
0 to 7
Default: 3
DIMENSIONh
Adjusts the depth of the surround
sound balance from front to back,
making the sound more distant
(minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
–3 to +3
Default: 0
PANORAMAh Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for
a ‘wraparound’ effect.
0 to 6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
AMP
THROUGH
ON
What it does
Adjusts the center image to
0 to 10
create a wider stereo effect with
Default: 3
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0
(Neo:6 Music),
(all center channel sent to front
10 (Neo:6
right and left speakers) to 10
Cinema)
(center channel sent to the center
speaker only).
EFFECT
Sets the effect level for the
currently selected Advanced
Surround mode (each mode can
be set separately).
Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture settings you can
make using the Video Parameter menu. The defaults, if
not stated, are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Video
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, setting and status of the receiver.
1
OFF
ON
Press RECEIVER, then press VIDEO PARAMETER.
2 Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each
setting.1
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
1 Brightness, Contrast, Hue, Chroma, Resolution and Aspect can be set for each input source.
En
10 to 90
a.When MCACC OFF is selected, all MCACC preset memories become
deactivated.
b.Cannot be selected when DTS-HD and DTS-EXPRESS audio signals are
being input and the HOME THX mode is set. In this case, the ADVANCED
MCACC indicator automatically turns off.
c.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light even when
a MCACC preset memory is selected.
d.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select
MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
e. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but
if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB.
f. • HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing
synchronized amp mode operations.
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the
receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with the receiver’s
power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp mode on page 64.
g.This feature is only available when the connected display supports the
automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI. If you
find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and
adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lip-sync feature
of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.
h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/
Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema and Neo:6
Music mode.
Note
70
Option(s)
C.
(Center
Image)
(Applicable
only when
using a
center
speaker)
IMAGEi
VSX-LX51_HY.book
71 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Converts video signals for output
V. CONV
(Digital
from the MONITOR OUT jacks for
Video
all video types.
Conversion)
11
Option(s)
ON
OFF
BRIGHT
Adjusts the overall brightness.
(Brightness)
–10 to +10
Default: 0
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between
light and dark.
–10 to +10
Default: 0
HUE
Adjusts the red/green balance.
–10 to +10
Default: 0
CHROMA
Adjusts saturation from dull to
bright.
–10 to +10
Default: 0
Specifies the output resolution of
RESa
(Resolution) the video signal (when analog
video input signals are output at
the HDMI OUT connector, select
this according to the resolution of
your monitor and the images you
wish to watch). When AUTO is
selected, the resolution is
automatically selected depending
on the capability of the display
connected to this receiver. When
PURE is selected, the signals are
output with the same resolution
as when input.
ASPb
(Aspect)
Specifies the aspect ratio when
analog video input signals are
output at the HDMI output. Make
your desired settings while
checking each setting on your
display .
AUTO
PURE
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
Making an audio or a video recording
You can make an audio or a video recording from the
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).1
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on
page 12 for more on connections).
Since the video converter is not available when making
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder
as you used to connect your video source (the one you
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using S-Video if your source has
also been connected using S-Video.
For more information about video connections, see
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video
sources on page 17.
AUTO/
DIRECT
DVD
BD
TV
HDMI
DVR 1
DVR 2
CD
CD-R
HDD
THX
FM/AM
NORMAL
ZOOM
a.When a resolution value is selected in this setting and the analog signals
input are converted and output as HDMI signals, images may not appear
depending on the video signals being input or the resolution of your
monitor. Also, depending on the source component or the monitor being
used, the output resolution may be different from this setting. Conversion
to 1080p is available only for the input signals of 480i/576i/480p/576p.
b.If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on
the source component or on the monitor.
DVD
STATUS
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
iPod USB
INPUT
SELECT
THROUGH
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
CH
DIMMER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
TV CTRL
RECEIVER
1 Select the source you want to record.
Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).
• If necessary, press SIGNAL SEL to select the input
signal corresponding to the source component (see
Choosing the input signal on page 32 for more on
this).
2 Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD, etc.
3 Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video, etc. into the recording
device and set the recording levels.
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set
the audio recording level automatically—check the
component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.
4 Start recording, then start playback of the source
component.
Note
1 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the bass/treble controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
71
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
11
72 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Using other functions
Reducing the level of an analog signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find
the that the OVER indicator is lights often, or you can
hear distortion in the sound.1
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
9
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
AUDIO
CH
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
MAIN
ZONE 2
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use
the remote control to set the sleep timer.
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
2
3
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you
plan to use speakers with a 6 Ω impedance rating. Use
the front panel controls to do this.
• With the receiver in standby, press  STANDBY/
ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button.
Each time you do this, you switch between the
impedance settings:
• Speaker 6 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 6 Ω.
• Speaker 8 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are
rated at 8 Ω or more.
Using the sleep timer
1
Switching the speaker impedance
RECEIVER
• Press RECEIVER, then press A.ATT to switch the
input attenuator on or off.
GENRE
• Press RECEIVER, then press DIMMER repeatedly to
change the brightness of the front panel display.
AUDIO
CH
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your current
settings for features such as surround back channel
processing and your current MCACC preset.
RECEIVER
THX
A.ATT
7
8
9
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
MAIN
ZONE 2
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
• Press RECEIVER, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set
the sleep time.
30 min
60 min
Off
90 min
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will
cycle through the sleep options again.2
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels for the
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
MPX
INPUT
SELECT
DIMMER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
9
TV CTRL
CH
RECEIVER
MAIN
CH
RECEIVER
The front panel display shows each of the following
settings for three seconds each:
Input source
↓
Surround Back Processing
↓
MCACC preset
↓
ZONE 2
↓
HDMI Control
2 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to
switch off the display.
ZONE 2
Note
En
SIGNAL SEL
1 Press RECEIVER, then press STATUS to check the
system settings.
These appear on the front panel display.3
1 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes.
2 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
3 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.
72
PHASE
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
iPod USB
FM/AM
STATUS
DTV/TV
VSX-LX51_HY.book
73 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Using other functions
11
Setting
Default
Resetting the system
Sound Delay
0.0 frame
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
Dual Mono
CH1
DRC
OFF
1
Switch the receiver into standby.
SACD Gain
0 dB
2 While holding down the front panel STEREO/A.L.C
button, press and hold  STANDBY/ON for about two
seconds.
The display shows RESET?.
LFE Attenuate
0 dB
Auto delay
OFF
3 Press the front panel AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT
button.
The display shows OK.
Effect Level
4 Press HOME THX to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
has been reset to the factory default settings.
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
receiver is unplugged.
Default system settings
Setting
Default
HDMI Audio
Amp
HDMI Control
ON
Digital Video Conversion
ON
Speakers
A
Surround Back System
Speaker System
Normal
Front
SMALL
Center
SMALL
Surr
SMALL
SB
SMALLx2
SW
YES
Crossover
80 Hz
X-Curve
OFF
THX Audio Setting
0.0–0.3m
Digital Safety
2 PL II Music
Options
OFF
Extended Stereo
90
Other modes
50
Center Width
3
Dimension
0
Panorama
OFF
Neo:6 Options
Center Image
3 (Neo:6 Music)
10 (Neo:6
Cinema)
All Inputs
Listening Mode
(2 ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Listening Mode
(x ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Listening Mode
(HP)
STEREO
See also Setting the Audio options on page 69 for other default
DSP settings.
MCACC
MCACC Position Memory
M1: MEMORY 1
Channel Level (M1–M6)
0.0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1–M6)
3.00 m
Standing Wave
(M1–M6)
ATT
0.0 dB
SWch Wide Trim
0.0 dB
EQ Data (M1–M6)
All channels/bands 0.0 dB
EQ Wide Trim
0.0 dB
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on page 66.
MULTI-ZONE
Zone 2 Volume Type
Variable
Zone 2 Volume
–60 dB
SR+
SR+ Control On/Off
OFF
SR+ Volume Control On/Off
OFF
Monitor Out
OFF
DSP
Surround back channel Processing
ON
Phase Control
ON
Sound Retriever
OFF
73
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
12
74 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Controlling the rest of your system
Chapter 12:
Controlling the rest of your system
Setting the remote to control other
components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input
source buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote
control will not work for the model that you are using.
Note
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing
RECEIVER. To go back a step, press RETURN.
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
Selecting preset codes directly
ENTER
ST
RECEIVER
SOURCE
DVD
BD
TV
DVR 1
DVR 2
CD
FM/AM
HDMI
CD-R
iPod USB
RETURN
SETUP TUNE
iPod CTRL
AUTO/
DIRECT
HDD
THX
INPUT
SELECT
ST
PTY
SEARCH
STEREO/
BD MENU
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR
DVD
STATUS
PHASE
DIMMER
1
2
3
GENRE
MCACC
SLEEP
4
5
6
SR+
SBch
A.ATT
7
8
D.ACCESS
CH LEVEL
CLASS
0
ENTER
9
DTV/TV
EON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TV CTRL
MPX
SIGNAL SEL
CH
RECEIVER
MASTER
1 While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP.
The indicator on the remote control blinks.
2 Press the input source button for the component
you want to control.
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV
CTRL here.
The indicator lights
up.1
3 Use the number buttons to enter the 3 digit preset
code (see below).
The indicator blinks for half a second after you input each
digit and shows a long, two second blink once you have
entered a valid code. If the LED blinks three times, it
means an invalid code has been input or an error has
occurred.
Note
1 You can’t assign the RECEIVER, FM/AM, iPod USB buttons.
74
En
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other components
you want to control.
5 When you’re done, press RECEIVER.
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there
is one).
Preset code list
You should have no problem controlling a component if
you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that
there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the
list will not work for the model that you are using. There
are also cases where only certain functions may be
controllable after assigning the proper preset code.
DVD
Manufacturer Code
TOSHIBA 001, 021
SONY 002, (video game) 016
PANASONIC 003, 019
JVC 004
SAMSUNG 005
SHARP 006
AKAI 007
RCA 008, 011
DENON 003, 010
HITACHI 012
PHILIPS 013
LOEWE 013
ZENITH 014
GOLDSTAR 014
THOMSON 015
PIONEER 000, 003, 009, 018, 020,
(BDP) 021, (BDP) 023,
MICROSOFT (video game) 017
LD
Manufacturer Code
DENON 110
HITACHI 109
PHILIPS 104
SONY 101, 102
TELEFUNKEN 100
PIONEER 100, 111
KENWOOD 103
PANASONIC 105, 106
RCA 107
SAT
Manufacturer Code
PIONEER 200, 204, 254
CD
Manufacturer Code
AKAI 335
ARCAM 336
ASUKA 337
AUDIO TON 336
BUSH 332
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 304
CYRUS 336
DENON 309
DUAL 337, 319
FISHER 340
GOLDSTAR 330
GRUNDIG 336
HITACHI 334
INTERSOUND 337
JVC 331
KENWOOD 310, 311
KODAK 322
LINN 336
LUXMAN 341
M ELECTRONIC 344
MARANTZ 304, 336
MATSUI 336
MCS 304
MEMOREX 300
MERIDIAN 336
MITSUBISHI 335
NAD 316
NAIM 336
ONKYO 342
OPTIMUS 300
PANASONIC 304
PHILIPS 336, 322
QUAD 336
QUASAR 304
RCA 319
ROADSTAR 344
ROTEL 336
SABA 319
SANYO 340
SHARP 343
SONY 329, 316
TECHNICS 304, 333
TELEFUNKEN 319
THOMSON 319
UNIVERSUM 336
YAMAHA 338, 339
PIONEER 300, 348
DVR
Manufacturer Code
PIONEER 480, 481, 482, 483, 484,
487, 488, 489, 493
TOSHIBA 485, 495
SONY 490, 494
PANASONIC 491, 492
SHARP 496
VSX-LX51_HY.book
75 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Controlling the rest of your system
VCR
Manufacturer Code
PHILIPS 414, 428
PANASONIC 432, 408
THOMSON 417, 449, 428
SONY 416, 417, 457, 458, 459
JVC 407, 417, 428
GRUNDIG 408, 414, 441, 453, 454,
455
AKAI 442, 417
HITACHI 406, 417, 441
TOSHIBA 405, 409, 414, 417, 428
MITSUBISHI 407, 409, 414, 456
SHARP 402, 456
ORION 445, 446, 424
SANYO 444
FERGUSON 417, 449, 450
BLAUPUNKT 432, 408, 417, 455
NOKIA 442, 444, 417
SELECO 417
AIWA 446, 441
AKIBA 453
ALBA 446, 447, 448, 452, 424
AMBASSADOR 452
AMSTRAD 441
ANITECH 453
ASA 411, 414
BAIRD 444, 417, 441, 450
BASIC LINE 448, 452, 453
BRANDT 449, 451
BRANDT ELECTRONIQUE 417
BUSH 446, 447, 448, 424, 453
CATRON 452
CGB 441
CIMLINE 453
CLATRONIC 452
CONDOR 452
CROWN 448, 452, 453
DAEWOO 448, 452
DANSAI 453
DE GRAAF 406
DECCA 414, 441
DUAL 417
DUMONT 444, 414, 441
ELCATECH 453
FIDELITY 441
FINLANDIA 444, 414
FINLUX 406, 444, 414, 441
FIRSTLINE 405, 409, 411, 424, 453
FISHER 444
FRONTECH 452
FUNAI 441
GBC 414
GENERAL 452
GOLDSTAR 411
GOODMANS 411, 448, 441, 452,
453
GRAETZ 444, 417
GRANADA 444, 414
GRADIENTE 441
GRANDIN 411, 441, 453
HCM 453, 454
HINARI 445, 446, 453, 454
HYPSON 453
IMPERIAL 441
INTERFUNK 414
ITT 442, 444, 417, 428
ITV 411, 448
KAISUI 453
KENDO 444, 424
KORPEL 453
LEYCO 453
LOEWE 411, 414, 432
LUXOR 442, 409, 444
M-ELECTRONIC 441
MANESTH 405, 453
MARANTZ 414
MATSUI 445, 446, 424
MEMOREX 444, 411, 441
MEMPHIS 453
METZ 432, 455
MINERVA 455
MULTITECH 441, 453
MURPHY 441
NBC 407, 417
NECKERMANN 414
NESCO 453
NORDMENDE 417, 428
OCEANIC 417, 441
OSAKI 411, 441, 453
OTTO VERSAND 414
PALLADIUM 411, 417, 453
PATHE MARCONI 417
PENTAX 406
PERDIO 441
PHONOLA 414
PORTLAND 452
PROLINE 441, 454
PYE 414
QUELLE 414
RADIOLA 414
REX 417, 428
ROADSTAR 411, 448, 453
SABA 417, 449, 428
SAISHO 445, 424
SALORA 442, 409
SANSUI 407, 417
SBR 414
SCHAUB LORENZ 417, 441
SCHNEIDER 414, 441, 453
SEI 414
SENTRA 452
SHINTOM 453
SIEMENS 444, 411, 455
SINGER 405
SINUDYNE 414
SOLAVOX 452
SUNSTAR 441
SUNTRONIC 441
TASHIKO 441
TATUNG 414, 417, 441
TEC 452
TELEAVIA 417
TELEFUNKEN 417, 449, 451, 428
TENOSAL 453
TENSAI 441
THORN 444, 417
UNIVERSUM 442, 411, 414, 441,
455
YAMISHI 453
YOKAN 453
YOKO 452
KENWOOD 456
PIONEER 400, 443, 407, 456, 414
CATV
Manufacturer Code
PIONEER 700
SA 706, 708
JERROLD 716
ZENITH 717
TAPE
Manufacturer Code
AKAI 829
ARCAM 810
DENON 810, 827
FISHER 813
GRUNDIG 821
JVC 802
KENWOOD 804, 807, 822
LUXMAN 815
MARANTZ 821
MEMOREX 825
MITSUBISHI 829
NAKAMICHI 816
ONKYO 817, 819
OPTOMUS 800
PHILIPS 821
SANSUI 824
SHERWOOD 818
SONY 814, 823
TANDBERG 820
TECHNICS 803
TOSHIBA 826, 828
12
YAMAHA 811, 822
PIONEER 800, 825
MD
Manufacturer Code
SONY 901
KENWOOD 903
SHARP 902
TEAC 904
ONKYO 905
DENON 906
PIONEER 900, 902, 907, 908
CD-R
Manufacturer Code
PIONEER 345
PHILIPS 346
YAMAHA 347
TV
Manufacturer Code
ACURA 644
ADMIRAL 631
AKAI 632, 635, 642
AKURA 641
ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644
AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647
ANITECH 644
ASA 645
ASUKA 641
AUDIOGONIC 607, 636
BASIC LINE 641, 644
BAUR 631, 607, 642
BEKO 638
BEON 607
BLAUPUNKT 631
BLUE SKY 641
BLUE STAR 618
BPL 618
BRANDT 636
BTC 641
BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656,
DAEWOO 607, 644, 656, 676, 677
CASCADE 644
CATHAY 607
CENTURION 607
CGB 642
CIMLINE 644
CLARIVOX 607
CLATRONIC 638
CONDOR 638
CONTEC 644
CROSLEY 632
CROWN 638, 644
CRYSTAL 642
CYBERTRON 641
DAEWOO 607
DAINICHI 641
DANSAI 607
DAYTON 644
DECCA 607, 648
DIXI 607, 644
DUMONT 653
ELIN 607
ELITE 641
ELTA 644
EMERSON 642
EPSON 681
ERRES 607
FERGUSON 607, 636, 651
FINLANDIA 635, 643, 654
FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653,
654
FIRSTLINE 640, 644
FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645
FORMENTI 632, 607, 642
FRONTECH 631, 642, 646
FRONTECH/PROTECH 632
FUJITSU 648
FUNAI 640, 646
GBC 632, 642
GE 600, 602, 607, 664, 608, 618
GEC 605, 607, 634, 648
GELOSO 632, 644
GENEXXA 631, 641
GOLDSTAR 607, 602, 650
GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648,
656
GORENJE 638
GPM 641
GRAETZ 631, 642
GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648
GRADIENTE 657
GRANDIN 618
GRUNDIG 631, 653
HANSEATIC 607, 642
HCM 618, 644
HINARI 607, 641, 644
HISAWA 618
HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642,
643, 654, 606, 618
HUANYU 656
HYPSON 607, 618, 646
ICE 646, 647
IMPERIAL 638, 642
INDIANA 607
INGELEN 631
INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642
INTERVISION 646, 649
ISUKAI 641
ITC 642
ITT 631, 632, 642
JEC 605
JVC 613, 683
KAISUI 618, 641, 644
KAPSCH 631
KENDO 642
KENNEDY 632, 642
KORPEL 607
KOYODA 644
LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648
LIESENK&TTER 607
LOEWE 607
LUXOR 632, 642, 643
M-ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654,
656, 607, 636, 651
MAGNADYNE 632, 649
MAGNAFON 649
MAGNAVOX 607
MANESTH 639, 646
MARANTZ 607
MARK 607
MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644,
647, 648
MCMICHAEL 634
MEDIATOR 607
MEMOREX 644
METZ 631
MINERVA 631, 653
MITSUBISHI 631, 602, 609, 682
MULTITECH 644, 649
NECKERMANN 631, 607
NEI 607, 642
NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648
NOBLIKO 649
NOKIA 632, 642, 652
NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652
OCEANIC 631, 632, 642
ORION 632, 607, 639, 640
OSAKI 641, 646, 648
OSO 641
OSUME 648
OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642
PALLADIUM 638
PANAMA 646
PANASONIC 631, 607, 608, 642,
622
PATHO CINEMA 642
PAUSA 644
PHILCO 632, 642
PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656, 668,
672
PHOENIX 632
PHONOLA 607
PROFEX 642, 644
75
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
12
76 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Controlling the rest of your system
PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649
QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645,
653
R-LINE 607
RADIOLA 607
RBM 653
RCA 618, 609
REDIFFUSION 632, 642
REX 631, 646
ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646,
SABA 631, 636, 642, 651,
SAISHO 639, 644, 646
SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643
SAMBERS 649
SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646, 669,
670, 673, 674, 675
SANYO 635, 645, 648, 685
SBR 607, 634
SCHAUB LORENZ 642
SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647
SEG 642, 646
SEI 632, 640, 649
SELECO 631, 642
SHARP 602, 662
SIAREM 632, 649
SIEMENS 631
SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649
SKANTIC 643
SOLAVOX 631
SONOKO 607, 644
SONOLOR 631, 635
SONTEC 607
SONY 604, 684
SOUNDWAVE 607
STANDARD 641, 644
STERN 631
SUSUMU 641
SYSLINE 607
TANDY 631, 641, 648
TASHIKO 634
TATUNG 607, 648
TEC 642
TELEAVIA 636
TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652
TELETECH 644
TENSAI 640, 641
THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648
TOMASHI 618
THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663
TOSHIBA 602, 605, 653
TOWADA 642
ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649
UNIDEN 687
UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642,
645, 646, 654
VESTEL 607
VOXSON 631
WALTHAM 643
WATSON 607
WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607
YAMAHA 686
YOKO 607, 642, 646
PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636,
642, 651, 664, 665, 680, 689, 690,
691
Controls for TVs
This remote control can control components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other
components above for more on this). Use the input
source buttons to select the component.
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the
TV CTRL button.
Button(s)
Function
Components
TV
Press to switch the component
assigned to the TV CTRL button
on or off.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
INPUT
Switches the TV input (Not
possible with all models).
TV
CH +/–
Selects channels.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
VOL +/–
Adjust the TV volume.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
Button(s)
Function
Components

Use to choose the CYAN/E
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
Satellite TV/TV

Use to choose the GREEN/C
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
Satellite TV/TV

Use to choose the YELLOW/D
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
Satellite TV/TV
AUDIO
Use to switch audio tracks.
Satellite TV/TV
TOOLS
Use to display the TOOLS menu
on the flat screen TV.
TV
EXIT
Use to return to the normal
screen in one step.
TV
RETURN
Use to select RETURN or EXIT.
Satellite TV/TV
Number
buttons
Use to select a specific TV
channel.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
D.ACCESS
Use to add a decimal point when Satellite TV/TV
selecting a TV channel.
ENTER/
CLASS
Use to enter a channel.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
MENU
Select the menu screen.
Cable TV/
Satellite TV/TV
///
Select, adjust and navigate items Cable TV/
 & ENTER on the menu screen.
Satellite TV/TV
TOP MENU Switches TEXT ON/OFF for TVs.
Controls for other components
This remote control can control these components after
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the
commands (see Setting the remote to control other
components on page 74 for more on this). Use the input
source buttons to select the component.
Button(s)
76
En
Use to choose the ‘A’ commands Satellite TV
on a Satellite TV menu.

Use to choose the RED/B
commands on a Satellite TV/TV
menu.
Satellite TV/TV
Function
SOURCE Press to switch the component
between standby and on.
Components
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck

Press to return to the start of the CD/MD/CD-R/
current track or chapter.
DVD/LD/BD
player
Repeated presses skips to the
start of previous tracks or
chapters.

Press to advance to the start of
the next track or chapter.
Repeated presses skips to the
start of following tracks or
chapters.
SOURCE Switches the TV or CATV between Cable TV/
standby and on.
Satellite TV/TV

TV
CD/MD/CD-R/
DVD/LD/BD
player
VSX-LX51_HY.book
77 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Controlling the rest of your system
12
Button(s)
Function
Components
Button(s)

Pause playback or recording.
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck
///
Navigates DVD menu/options.
 & ENTER
E
Cassette deck
/
Fast rewinds/fast forwards the
tape.
Cassette deck
ST
RETURN
TUNE
SURR
D ADV
TUNE
STANDAR
PHASE
R
CH
MPX
CTRL SETUP
STEREO/
F.S.SURR
STATUS
DVD
EON
AUTO/
DIRECT
HDD
RECEIVE
2
THX
DISPLAY
ZONE
DTV/TV
AUDIO
CTRL
TV
MAIN
EXIT
ENTER
MENU
ST
iPod
RECE
IVER
SOURC
HDMI
CD-R
USB
TV
iPod
CD
R
ER
MUTE
ER
BD
3
DIMME
2
TOP
Starts playback.
IR
ZONE2
IN
IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
1-2
IN 3
CONTROL
(DVR2)
OUT
OUT
1
ASSIGNABLE
1-3
ENTER
PTY
SEARCH
R
IN 2
(DVR1)
OUT
MENU
T.EDIT
VIDEO
TOOL PARAMET
OUT
SLEEP
L
1
IN 1
(TV SAT)
AUDIO
PARAMET
IN 1
6
Cassette deck
CON- IN
TROL
RECEIV
Stops the tape.
IN
AU
OPTICAL
DVR

(CD)
BD IN
A.ATT
Cassette deck
RS-232C
IN 2
DVD
Pauses the tape.
CONTROL
(DVD)
9

VID
IN 1
1
DVD/BD/DVR
player
ASSIGNABLE 1 - 2
DVR
Displays menus concerning the
current DVD or DVR you are
using.
MENU
VIDE
COAXIAL
OUT
2
TOP MENU Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a DVD/BD/DVR
DVD player.
player
CLASS
LD player
D.ACCE
Changes sides of the LD.
ENTER
Displays the setup screen for DVR DVR player
players.
2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the
connection.
MCACC
VCR/DVD/BD
player
5
Use as the ENTER button.
INPUT
SELECT
Multiple CD
player
1 Decide which component you want to use the
remote sensor of.
When you want to control any component in the chain,
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the
corresponding remote control.
FM/AM
Chooses the disc.
Important
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or
HDMI jacks connected to another component for
grounding purposes.
SBch
ENTER/
CLASS
Many Pioneer components have CONTROL jacks which
can be used to link components together so that you can
use just the remote sensor of one component. When you
use a remote control, the control signal is passed along
the chain to the appropriate component.1
MASTE
VOLUM
R
E
Selects tracks higher than 10. (For CD/MD/CD-R/
example, press +10, then 3 to
VCR/LD player
select track 13.)
Operating other Pioneer components
with this receiver’s sensor
8
D.ACCESS
Switches to the DVD controls
DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
LEVEL
DVD/DVR
player
DVD
0
Use the number buttons to
navigate the on-screen display.
Switches to the hard disk controls DVR player
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.
CH
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/LD/BD
player
HDD
GENRE
Directly access tracks on a
program source.
DVD/BD/DVR
player
4
Number
buttons
Press to display information.
SR+
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck
DISPLAY
INPUT
Stops playback.
DVD/BD/DVR
player
SS

Changes the audio language or
channel.
7
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck
AUDIO
OL
Hold down for fast reverse
playback.
VCR/DVD/DVR
player
VOL
CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck
Selects channels.
CONTR

Hold down for fast forward
playback.
CH +/–
TV

CD/MD/CD-R/
VCR/DVD/LD/
BD/DVR
player/
Cassette deck
DVD/DVR
player
CH
Start playback.
Components
ER

Function
L
12V TRIGGER
IN
OUT
3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many
components as you have.
Note
1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, refer to Setting the remote to control other components on page 74.
If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this receiver using the remote sensor.
• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat screen TV on page 60 if you are connecting a Pioneer flat screen TV.
77
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
13
78 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Chapter 13:
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Power
Symptom
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
• Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of
off or the PHASE CONTROL
wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
indicator blinks.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized
independent service company.
During loud playback the
power suddenly switches off.
• Turn down the volume.
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 41.
• Try switching on the digital safety feature (put the receiver into standby, hold down the
ADVANCED/SURROUND button on the front panel and press  STANDBY/ON to switch between
SAFETY 1 ON (medium effect), SAFETY 2 ON (more effect) and SAFETY OFF). If the power switches
off even with SAFETY 2 ON, turn down the volume. With SAFETY 1 ON or SAFETY 2 ON on, some
features may be unavailable.
The unit does not respond
• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
when the buttons are pressed. • Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.
AMP ERR blinks in the display, • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer
then the power automatically authorized independent service company for help.
switches off. The MCACC
blinks and the power does not
turn on.
AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the • Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on. Check the safety
display, then the power
precautions on page 2 for information on improving heat dispersal.
automatically switches off.
Display blinks 12 TRG ERR.
• An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on.
The receiver suddenly switches • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer
off or DIGITAL PRECISION
authorized independent service company for help.
PROCESSING indicator blinks.
No sound
Symptom
Remedy
No sound is output when an
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).
input source is selected.
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.
No sound output from the front • Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
speakers.
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when PCM is
selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on
page 12).
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 20).
78
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
79 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Symptom
13
Remedy
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected;
center speakers.
select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 29).
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 48).
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 48).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 20).
No sound from surround back • Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on
speakers.
page 48).
• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel
processing on page 33).
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with
surround back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back
speakers. In this case, set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 33).
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set
to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 29).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 20). If only one surround
back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.
No sound from subwoofer.
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 48).
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of
your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 48).
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings
to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on
page 48).
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options
on page 69).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 48).
No sound from one speaker.
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 20).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 48).
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 48).
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening
mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 29).
Sound is produced from
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 32).
analog components, but not
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected
from digital ones (DVD, LD, CD- to (see The Input Setup menu on page 65).
ROM, etc.).
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
output when Dolby Digital/DTS • Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set
software is played back.
to On.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
No sound when using the
• If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.
System Setup or Status menu. • If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.
79
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
13
80 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Other audio problems
Symptom
Remedy
Broadcast stations cannot be
selected automatically, or
there is considerable noise in
radio broadcasts.
For FM broadcasts
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 23).
For AM broadcasts
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 23).
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor,
etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
A multichannel DVD source
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog
appears to be downmixed to 2 inputs on page 55).
channels during playback.
Noise is output when scanning • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital
a DTS CD.
information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when
scanning.
When playing a DTS format LD • Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 32).
there is audible noise on the
soundtrack.
Can’t record audio.
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an
analog source.
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting
analog audio sources on page 19).
Subwoofer output is very low.
• To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see
Speaker Setting on page 48).
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the
correctly, but the playback
receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the
sound is odd.
speakers on page 20).
The PHASE CONTROL feature • If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is
doesn’t seem to have an
set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or
audible effect.
depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on
page 49).
Noise or hum can be heard
even when there is no sound
being input.
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source
are not causing interference.
There seems to be a time lag
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 9 to set up your system
between the speakers and the again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).
output of the subwoofer.
Can’t use the SR+ features.
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 63).
The maximum volume
• This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 48 have been adjusted, the
available (shown in the front
maximum volume will change accordingly.
panel display) is lower than the
+12dB maximum.
80
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
81 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
13
Video
Symptom
Remedy
No image is output when an
input is selected.
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 17).
• For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion
is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 70), you must connect your TV to this receiver
using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component or HDMI
cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 65).
• Check the video output settings of the source component.
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If
adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 70) and/or the
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video
Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 70) OFF.
Can’t record video.
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video
cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to
this receiver.
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the
picture.
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or
composite), then start playback again.
Settings
Symptom
Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup
continually shows an error.
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see
also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 10). If the noise level cannot be kept low
enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 41).
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)
terminals.
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the
surround back channel.
• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
After using the Auto MCACC • There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc.
Setup, the speaker size setting Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
is incorrect.
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some
cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 48, and use the ALL (Keep
SP System) option for the Custom Menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38 if this is a
recurring problem.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker
Distance setting (page 42)
properly.
• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are
matched up properly).
The display shows KEY LOCK
ON when you try to make
settings.
• With the receiver in standby, press  STANDBY/ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button to
disable the key lock.
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
erased.
81
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
13
82 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom
Remedy
The EQ response displayed in
the graphical output following
calibration does not appear
entirely flat.
• There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the
Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve
optimal sound.
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment
needed.
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.
EQ adjustments made using
the Manual MCACC setup on
page 41 do not appear to
change the graphical output.
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these
adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the
filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
Lower frequency response
curves do not seem to have
been calibrated for SMALL
speakers.
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers
that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable
sound is output for display.
Graphical output data seems to • If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.
have disappeared.
Display
Symptom
Remedy
The display is dark or off.
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
After making an adjustment
the display goes off.
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.
You can’t get DIGITAL to
display when using the
SIGNAL SEL button.
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The
Input Setup menu on page 65).
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.
The Dolby/DTS indicator
doesn’t light when playing
Dolby/DTS software.
• These indicators do dot light if playback is paused.
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.
When playing a DVD-Audio
disc, the DVD player display
shows 96 kHz. However, the
receiver’s display does not.
• This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog
outputs of the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the
analog inputs.
During playback of a DTS 96/24 • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 32).
source, the display doesn’t
show 96 kHz.
When playing Dolby Digital or
DTS sources, the receiver’s
format indicators do not light.
82
En
• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 32).
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.
VSX-LX51_HY.book
83 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Symptom
Remedy
When playing certain discs,
none of the receiver’s format
indicators light.
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what
audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
13
When playing a disc with the • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 32).
listening mode set to Auto
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is
Surround, the 2 PL II or Neo:6 not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.
indicator lights on the receiver.
During playback of a Surround • The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1
EX or DTS-ES source on the
compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 33), then switch
to the THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 29).
SBch AUTO setting, the EX
and ES indicators don’t light, or
the signal is not properly
processed.
During playback of DVD-Audio, • This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a
the display shows PCM.
malfunction.
Remote control
Symptom
Remedy
Cannot be remote controlled.
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 7).
• Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see
Operating range of remote control unit on page 25).
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this
receiver’s sensor on page 77).
Other components can’t be
operated with the system
remote.
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
The SR cable is connected, but
the connected components
can’t be operated with the
remote.
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a
Pioneer flat screen TV on page 60).
• Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units. This is necessary for the
SR feature to work.
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer
equipment.
USB interface
Symptom
Remedy
USB mass storage device is
• Try switching the receiver off, then on again.
not recognized by the receiver. • Make sure you have completely inserted the USB connector to this receiver.
• Check that the memory format is FAT16 or FAT32 (FAT12, NTFS and HFS are not supported).
• USB devices with an internal USB hub are not supported.
USB ERROR3 shows in the
display when connecting a
USB device.
• If this message continues to appear after going through all the checks in Important on page 53 of
Connecting a USB device, take the unit to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your
dealer for servicing.
Can’t play audio files.
• The WMA or MPEG-4 AAC files were recorded using DRM (digital rights management), or the bit
rate/sampling rate is not compatible (see Compressed audio compatibility on page 54). This is not a
malfunction.
83
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
13
84 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
HDMI
Symptom
Remedy
The HDMI indicator blinks
continuously.
• Check all the points below.
No picture or sound.
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCPcompatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-Video or composite video
jacks.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver
(even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-Video or composite
video jacks between source and receiver.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor
or other setting for your component.
• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or
other setting for your component.
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio
output.
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to
THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog
audio connection.
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (high speed HDMI cable) to connect this
receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.
No picture.
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 70).
No sound, or sound suddenly
ceases.
• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
Noisy or distorted picture.
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or
composite), then start playback again.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.
HDCP ERROR shows in the
display.
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible
with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-Video
or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be
displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
84
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
85 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Important information regarding the HDMI
connection
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI
signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMIequipped component you are connecting–check with the
manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this
receiver (from your component), please try one of the
following configurations when connecting up.
Configuration A
Use component video cables to connect the video output
of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s
component video input. The receiver can then convert the
analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal
for transmission to the display. For this configuration,
use the most convenient connection (digital is
recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the
operating instructions for more on audio connections.
Note
• The picture quality will change slightly during
conversion.
13
Configuration B
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the
display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most
convenient connection (digital is recommended) for
sending audio to the receiver. See the operating
instructions for more on audio connections. Set the
display volume to minimum when using this
configuration.
Note
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can
only receive HDMI video from the connected
component.
• Depending on the component, audio output may be
limited to the number of channels available from the
connected display unit (for example audio output is
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio
limitations).
• If you want to switch the input source, you’ll have to
switch functions on both the receiver and your
display unit.
• Since the sound is muted on the display when using
the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on
the display every time you switch input sources.
85
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
13
86 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding
system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD
and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six
discrete audio channels, comprising five full range
channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects)
channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects;
hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit
rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog
Normalization, attenuates programs based on the
average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak
level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve
uniform playback level.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended)
is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a
surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/
right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby
Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using
the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system
extracts surround sound from sources as follows:
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono
surround) from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo
surround) from any stereo source
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound
(stereo surround and surround back) from two
channel or 5.1 (and 6.1) channel sources
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver.
86
En
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for
enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio
technology for all high-definition programming and
media. It combines the efficiency to meet future
broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to
realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming
high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multichannel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts
worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the nextgeneration A/V receivers but remains fully compatible
with all current A/V receivers.
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of
up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a
single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on
Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for
playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital
Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended
by directors and producers.
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete
channel output, interactive mixing and streaming
capability in advanced systems. Supported by HighDefinition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital
connection is possible for high-definition audio and
video.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in
the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,
unlocking the true high-definition entertainment
experience on high-definition optical discs in the next
generation. When coupled with high-definition video,
Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater
experience with stunning sound and high-definition
picture.
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8
full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz
audio. It also features extensive metadata including
dialogue normalization and dynamic range control.
Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a
single-cable digital connection is possible for highdefinition audio and video.
* HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit
their maximum number of audio channels to eight,
whereas Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD
support more than eight audio channels.
VSX-LX51_HY.book
87 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.
13
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer
rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD
DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting
the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and
memory audio contents.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding
system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and
video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio
channels, comprising five full range channels, including
an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved
through the use of a low compression rate, and high
rates of transmittance during playback.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a
decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES
Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with
a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed
into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are
also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel
decoder.
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers
master audio sources recorded in a professional studio
to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio
quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data
transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum
rate of 24.5 Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in
the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a
standard DVD. These high data transfer rates enable
lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio
sources without deteriorating the quality of the original
sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable
technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as
intended by the creator of music or movies.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,
Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound
from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV)
and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel
information already encoded into the source, as well as
its own processing to determine channel localization
(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is
generated by bass management in the receiver). Two
modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS
Neo:6 with two channel sources.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio
using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully
backward compatible with all existing decoders. This
means that DVD players can play this software using a
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback
with sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique
WMA compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver
multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed
internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio
degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows
Media™ Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party
media players on a personal computer, or with an AV
amplifier with on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
87
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
88 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
13
About THX
The THX technologies are explained below. See
www.thx.com for more detailed information.
•
THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,
when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added
in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
•
Re-Equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in
a small home environment.
•
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to
the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely
match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front
speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and
surround speakers.
•
Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.
•
THX Select2 Plus
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 Plus
certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a
rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a
product feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee
that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus requirements
cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power
88
En
amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.
•
THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.
Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this
new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the
tastes of the individual listener.
•
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together
facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the
Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up
screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the
speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 CINEMA, THX Select2
MUSIC and THX Select2 GAMES.
•
THX Music
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
•
THX Games
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
13_additional_info.fm 89 ページ
2008年5月7日 水曜日 午後1時28分
Additional information
•
13
THX Loudness Plus Description
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in
THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified amplifiers. With
THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the
rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of
turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound
elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX
Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur
when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient
surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users
to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in
any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX
Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus
settings for each type of content.
About Neural – THX Surround
•
Neural-THX® Surround is taking surround sound to the next level. This
revolutionary new technology delivers the rich envelopment and
discrete image detail of surround sound in a format that is fully
compatible with stereo from various content sources. Neural-THX
Surround enables 5.1, 6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies
and digital music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep ambience
and subtle details of movies, music and games.
Neural-THX® Digital Music™ is a new surround mode specifically
designed to enhance the playback of compressed digital music content.
It provides listeners with an expanded sound stage and clean surround
experience, even with compressed audio sources such as MP3s and
Internet streams.
ASA Description
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer), be sure to go to the THX Audio Set-up screen and choose
the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing,
which will re-optimize the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three
modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2 Games.
•
THX Select2 Cinema
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and
directional surround sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.
•
THX Select2 Music
For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Select2 Music mode
should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the
surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS,
Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear
soundstage.
•
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official surround sound
format TV sports broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet
streaming as well as leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And
with this technology being used by sound designers during content
creation, as well as embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX
Surround promises a listening experience that is true to the original
mix.
For additional information, please visit www.neuralsurround.com.
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio
Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER hereby grants the user a nonexclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product under
USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or
trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural
Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and
logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX
Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
THX Select2 Games
For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX
Select2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0
encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital.
This accurately places all game audio surround information,
providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Select2 Games
mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all
points of the surround field.
THX, the THX logo and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which
may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
89
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
13
90 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Listening modes with different input signal formats
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the
surround back channel processing and decoding method you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON/AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel
decoding)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
Stereo playback
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
As above
Stereo playback
As above
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
Stereo playback
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
As above
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX
GAMES
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 PRO LOGICa
2 PRO LOGICa
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THXa
THX Select2 GAMESb
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX
GAMES
THX Select2 GAMESb
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMAa
DTS Surround
As above
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
SACD
As above
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
Stereo playback
Other stereo sources
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX
GAMES
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
As above
2 PRO LOGICa
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THXc
THX Select2 GAMESb
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMAa
90
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
91 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
13
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
OFFd
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
CINEMA
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX
GAMES
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
Stereo playback
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
As above
Stereo playback
As above
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD
DTS-EXPRESS
Stereo playback
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
As above
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 PRO LOGIC
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
CINEMA
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX
GAMES
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
DTS Surround
As above
As above
Neo:6 CINEMA
SACD
As above
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 PRO LOGIC ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
Stereo playback
Other stereo sources
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX
CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC
2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX
GAMES
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX
2 PRO LOGIC+THX
As above
2 PRO LOGICa
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 MUSIC
Neural THXc
a. No sound is output from the surround back speakers when 2 Pro Logic is selected.
b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
c. This is only selectable when the input signal is an analog or PCM signal.
d.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
91
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
13
92 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Multichannel signal formats
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used
for all sources)
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
Straight decoding
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
(except for 176.4 kHz/
192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
Dolby Digital EX
THX SURROUND EX
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
a
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX
THX Select2 CINEMAa
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
THX Select2 MUSICa
THX Select2 GAMESa
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
2 EX+THX GAMESb
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
As above
Straight decoding
As above
DTS-EXPRESS
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
(5.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX CINEMAb
Straight decoding
THX Select2
CINEMAa
THX Select2 MUSICa
THX Select2 GAMESa
THX MUSICb
THX GAMESb
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX
MOVIEa
2 Pro Logic IIx
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIE+THXa
THX Select2 CINEMAa
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIEa
THX Select2 MUSICa
THX Select2 GAMESa
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
2 EX+THX GAMESb
DTS-ES
(6.1 channel sources/
6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MUSIC
DTS-ES Matrix+THX CINEMA DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES Discrete+THX CINEMA
DTS+2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIE+THXa
THX Select2 CINEMAa
THX Select2 MUSICa
THX Select2 GAMESa
DTS-ES Matrix+THX MUSICb
DTS-ES Matrix+THX GAMESb
DTS-ES Discrete+THX MUSICb
DTS-ES Discrete+THX GAMESb
92
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
93 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
13
SBch Processing
Input signal format
Standard
THX
Auto Surround
SBch
Processing
ON
(7.1 channel
decoding used
for all sources)
DTS and DTS 96/24
(5.1 channel encoding)
DTS+Neo:6
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx
MUSIC
DTS+Neo:6+THX CINEMA
DTS+2 Pro Logic IIx
MOVIE+THXa
DTS+Neo:6
THX Select2 CINEMAa
THX Select2 MUSICa
THX Select2 GAMESa
DTS+Neo:6+THX MUSICb
DTS+Neo:6+THX GAMESb
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THXa
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital EX
WMA9 Pro
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
PCM
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC
(5.1 channel encoding)
THX SURROUND EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THXa
THX Select2 CINEMAa
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
THX Select2 MUSICa
THX Select2 GAMESa
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THXa
2 EX+THX GAMESb
SBch
Processing
AUTO
(Automatically
selects 6.1/7.1
channel
decoding)
SBch
Processing
OFFc
SACD
(5.1 channel encoding)
As above
THX Select2 MUSIC
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX
MUSIC
As above
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS-HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
WMA9 Pro
PCM
(6.1/7.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX CINEMA
Straight decoding
Dolby TrueHD
(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)
(5.1 channel)
As above
Straight decoding
As above
Dolby Digital EX
(6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX
THX SURROUND EX
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
2 Pro Logic llx
MOVIEa
DTS-ES (6.1 channel
sources/6.1 channel
flagged)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Other 5.1 channel
sources
(5.1 channel encoding)
Straight decoding
THX Select2 CINEMAa
Straight decoding
SACD
(5.1 channel encoding)
As above
SACD
(5.1 channel)
Straight decoding
THX MUSIC
Straight decoding
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1
channel sources
As above
THX CINEMA
THX MUSIC
THX GAMES
As above
THX
CINEMAb
THX Select2 MUSICa
THX
As above
MUSICb
a. Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
b.This can be selected when only one surround speaker is connected.
c. Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.
93
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
13
94 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
Stream direct with different input signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see
Using Stream Direct on page 32) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)
Input signal format
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Connected
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS Surround
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
Analog sources
As above
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS Surround
Neo:6 CINEMA
Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources
Stereo playback
Stereo playback
Analog sources
As above
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
Not connected
Multichannel signal formats
Surround Back speaker(s)
Input signal format
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Connected
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel
flagged)
Not connected
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
All 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
Straight decoding
Straight decoding
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
94
En
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
VSX-LX51_HY.book
95 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
Additional information
13
FM Tuner Section
Specifications
Amplifier section
Continuous Power Output (Stereo)
Front. . . . . . . . .150 W + 150 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)
120 W + 120 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)
Continuous Power Output (Multichannel)
Front. . . . . . . . .150 W + 150 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)
120 W + 120 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)
120 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)
Surround . . . . .150 W + 150 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)
120 W + 120 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)
Surround back
. . . . . . . . . . . . .150 W + 150 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)
120 W + 120 W (DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)
Rated Power Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W + 130 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09 %, 6 Ω)
Rated Power Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 Ω)
• The above specifications are applicable when the
power supply is 230 V.
Audio Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 mV/47 kΩ
Frequency Response (LINE). . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 kΩ
Tone Control
BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 dB (100 Hz)
TREBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 6 dB (10 kHz)
LOUDNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . +4 dB/+2 dB (100 Hz/10 kHz)
(at volume position –40 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
[DIN (continuous rated power output/50 mW)]
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 dB/65 dB
Composite Video/S-Video Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 10 MHz
Component Video Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 MHz
HDMI Section
Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin x 3
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (5 V, 100 mA)
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Usable Sensitivity . . . . . . .Mono: 15.2 dBf, IHF (1.6 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 20.2 dBf
Stereo: 41.2 dBf
Sensitivity (DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mono: 1.1 µV (S/N 26 dB)
Stereo: 50 µV (S/N 46 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 76 dB (at 85 dBf)
Stereo: 72 dB (at 85 dBf)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (DIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 62 dB
Stereo: 58 dB
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo: 0.6 % (1 kHz)
Alternate Channel Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 dB (400 kHz)
Stereo Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 dB (1 kHz)
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 15 kHz ± 1 dB
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced
AM Tuner Section
Frequency Range . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz (9 kHz step)
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 µV/m
Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 dB
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
Miscellaneous
Power Requirements. . . . . . . AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 W
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6 W (HDMI Control OFF)
0.75 W (HDMI Control ON)
Dimensions . . . . . . 420 (W) mm x 173 (H) mm x 433 (D) mm
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 kg
Furnished Parts
Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC setup). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
These operating instructions
Note
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible
modifications without notice, due to improvements.
Cleaning the unit
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and
dirt.
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or
cleansers.
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or
other chemicals on or near this receiver, since these
will corrode the surface.
95
En
VSX-LX51_HY.book
96 ページ
2008年4月16日 水曜日 午後4時39分
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<ARB7408-A>
Printed in
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement